0% found this document useful (0 votes)

2 views477 pages

SP3D StructuralDetailingGuide

Uploaded by

Amina Qureshi

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

2 views477 pages

SP3D StructuralDetailingGuide

Uploaded by

Amina Qureshi

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

Intergraph Smart® 3D

Structural Detailing User's Guide

Version 2018 (12.0)
June 2018
Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2018 Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates. All rights reserved.
This computer program, including software, icons, graphic symbols, documentation, file formats, and audio-visual displays; may be
used only as pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Hexagon AB
and/or third parties which is protected by patent, trademark, copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be
provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. © 1986-2018. All Rights Reserved.
Portions of the user interface are copyright © 2012-2018 Telerik AD.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Hexagon PPM
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758

Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.

Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or [Link], any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.

Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the Software License Agreement ("SLA") delivered with the software
product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the Licensee has
a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and
govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license
agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the Documentation as
defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal, non-commercial
use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a SLA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and
for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.

Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the SLA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 2

The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.

Export Controls
Intergraph Corporation’s commercial-off-the-shelf software products, customized software and/or third-party software, including any
technical data related thereto (“Technical Data”), obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, is subject to
the export control laws and regulations of the United States of America. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. To the extent
prohibited by United States or other applicable laws, Intergraph Corporation software products, customized software, Technical Data,
and/or third-party software, or any derivatives thereof, obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors must not
be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access) under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, the Crimean region of Ukraine, or Syria, or any national of these countries or territories.
b. To any person or entity listed on any United States government denial list, including, but not limited to, the United States
Department of Commerce Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, the United States Department of Treasury Specially
Designated Nationals List, and the United States Department of State Debarred List
([Link]
c. To any entity when Customer knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the software product, customized software,
Technical Data and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors is related to the
design, development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or
sensitive nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Customer knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export/re-export of relevant Intergraph Corporation software product, customized software, Technical Data
and/or third-party software obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries or distributors, should be addressed to PPM’s
Export Compliance Department, 305 Intergraph Way, Madison, Alabama 35758 USA or at exportcompliance@[Link].
Customer shall hold harmless and indemnify PPM and Hexagon Group Company for any causes of action, claims, costs, expenses
and/or damages resulting to PPM or Hexagon Group Company from a breach by Customer.

Trademarks
Intergraph®, the Intergraph logo ®, Intergraph Smart®, SmartPlant® , SmartMarine®, SmartSketch®, SmartPlant Cloud®, PDS® ,
FrameWorks® , I-Route, I-Export, Isogen®, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager®, SupportModeler®, SAPPHIRE®, TANK, PV Elite®,
CADWorx®, CADWorx DraftPro ®, GTSTRUDL®, and CAESAR II® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation
or its affiliates, parents, subsidiaries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are registered trademarks of Hexagon AB or its subsidiaries.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. ACIS is a registered trademark of SPATIAL
TECHNOLOGY, INC. Infragistics, Presentation Layer Framework, ActiveTreeView Ctrl, ProtoViewCtl, ActiveThreed Ctrl,
ActiveListBar Ctrl, ActiveSplitter, ActiveToolbars Ctrl, ActiveToolbars Plus Ctrl, and ProtoView are trademarks of Infragistics, Inc.
Incorporates portions of 2D DCM, 3D DCM, and HLM by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights
reserved. Gigasoft is a registered trademark, and ProEssentials a trademark of Gigasoft, Inc. VideoSoft and VXFlexGrid are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of ComponentOne LLC 1991-2018, All rights reserved. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and
Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Tribon is a trademark of AVEVA Group plc. Alma and
act/cut are trademarks of the Alma company. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 3

Contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................. 14

Copy By Family Audit Report ............................................................................................................ 350

Generate an object summary report in manual mode ..................................................................... 354
Generate an object summary report in auto select family objects mode .......................................... 354
Generate an object summary report in auto select family objects in workspace mode..................... 355
Generate a property summary report in manual mode.................................................................... 355
Generate a property summary report in auto select family objects mode ........................................ 355
Generate a property summary report in auto select family objects in workspace mode ................... 356

Place Assembly Connection ............................................................................................................. 357

Place an assembly connection ....................................................................................................... 364
Edit assembly connection properties .............................................................................................. 365
Delete an assembly connection ..................................................................................................... 365
Add auxiliary parts to an assembly connection ............................................................................... 365
Edit assembly connection parts...................................................................................................... 366
Place free end cuts ........................................................................................................................ 366
Edit free end cut properties ............................................................................................................ 366
Delete free end cut ........................................................................................................................ 367
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (Members) ................................................................ 367
Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ............................................... 367
Definition Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box)................................................... 372
Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ................................................... 372

Place Manual Chamfer ....................................................................................................................... 374

Place a manual chamfer ................................................................................................................ 375
Modify a chamfer ........................................................................................................................... 376

Board Management Service .............................................................................................................. 377

Run the board management service .............................................................................................. 378
Board Management Service Console ............................................................................................. 378

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 10

Contents

Board Assignment by Filter............................................................................................................... 380

Run board assignment by filter....................................................................................................... 380
Board Assignment by Filter Dialog ................................................................................................. 380
Board Assignment by Filter Progress Bar ....................................................................................... 381

Submit Batch Job .............................................................................................................................. 383

Run a detailing batch process ........................................................................................................ 383
Run a production batch process ..................................................................................................... 384
Run a custom batch process .......................................................................................................... 384
Add a custom batch process .......................................................................................................... 385
Generic Batch Command Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 386
Batch Process Selection Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 387

Delay Settings (Tools Menu) ............................................................................................................. 388

Turn on delay operations ............................................................................................................... 388
Update delayed objects ................................................................................................................. 388
Turn off delay operations ............................................................................................................... 389
Delay Operations Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 389
Delay Settings Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) .................................................................. 389
Update To Do Records Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) ..................................................... 390
To Do Delay Record Detail Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) ............................................... 391

Check Manufacturability .................................................................................................................... 392

Check objects for manufacturability................................................................................................ 393
Schedule check manufacturability using Batch Services................................................................. 393
Manufacturability Checking Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................. 394
Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies Dialog Box ....................................................................... 395

Property Dialog Boxes....................................................................................................................... 400

Common Property Tabs ................................................................................................................. 400
Relationships Tab .................................................................................................................... 400
Members Tab .......................................................................................................................... 401
Controlled Interfaces Tab ........................................................................................................ 401
Configuration Tab .................................................................................................................... 401
General Tab ............................................................................................................................ 402
Parameters Tab....................................................................................................................... 402
Smart Occurrence Ribbon.............................................................................................................. 403
Plate Part Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 403
Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................ 403
Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 405
General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 405
Weight & CG Tab .................................................................................................................... 407
Extended User Attributes Tab .................................................................................................. 407
Routing Tab............................................................................................................................. 407
Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 408
Main Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 408
Profile Section Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................ 409
General Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box) .................................................................. 410

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 11

Contents

Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box.................................................................................. 410

Main Tab ................................................................................................................................. 410
Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ................................................... 411
Slot Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 412
Main Tab ................................................................................................................................. 412
Selection Tab (Slot Properties Dialog Box) .............................................................................. 412
Collar Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 413
Main Tab (Collar Properties Dialog Box) .................................................................................. 414
Material Tab (Collar Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................. 415
Selection Tab (Collar Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................................... 415
Free End Cut Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 416
Main Tab ................................................................................................................................. 416
Selection Tab (Free End Cut Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................ 417
Web Cut Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 418
Main Tab ................................................................................................................................. 419
Selection Tab (Web Cut Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 419
Flange Cut Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 420
Main Tab ................................................................................................................................. 421
Selection Tab (Flange Cut Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................... 421
Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................... 422
Main Tab (Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................ 422
Selection Tab (Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 423
Bevel Parameters Tab ............................................................................................................. 424
Parameters Tab (Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box) ................................................. 424
Logical Connection Properties Dialog Box...................................................................................... 427
Main Tab (Logical Connections Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................ 427
General Tab (Logical Connections Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................... 428
Chamfer Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 429
Main Tab ................................................................................................................................. 431
Selection Tab (Chamfer Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 432
Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 433
Main Tab (Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 433
Cross Section Tab (Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box) ......................................................... 434
Section Orientation Tab (Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box) ................................................. 434
Beam Part Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................... 435
Main Tab (Beam Part Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................................... 435
Section Orientation Tab (Beam Part Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 436
General Tab (Beam Part Properties Dialog Box) ...................................................................... 436
Plate Edge Reinforcement Part Properties Dialog Box ................................................................... 437
Main Tab (Plate Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box)................................................... 437
Profile Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box ......................................................................... 438
Main Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) ......................................... 439
Cross Section Tab ................................................................................................................... 440
Section Orientation Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) ................... 440
General Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box)..................................... 441
Sketched Feature Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 442
Main Tab (Sketched Feature Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................ 442
Catalog Tab (Sketched Feature Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................... 443
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (Members) ................................................................ 443
Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ............................................... 443
Definition Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box)................................................... 448

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 12

Contents

Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ................................................... 448

2D Symbol Logging Settings............................................................................................................. 450

Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 451

Index ................................................................................................................................................... 469

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 13

Preface
This document is a user's guide for the Structural Detailing functionality of Intergraph Smart® 3D
and provides command reference information and procedural instructions.

Documentation Comments
For the latest support information for this product, comments or suggestions about this
documentation, and documentation updates for supported software versions, please visit
Intergraph Smart® Support ([Link]

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 14

What's New in Structural Detailing
The following changes have been made to the Structural Detailing task.
Version 2018 (12.0)
 The new Tools > Board Assignment by Filter command updates the symmetry of plate
parts, profile parts, seams, features, openings, and hole traces by using filters that you
define to select candidates and target objects. For more information, see Board Assignment
by Filter (on page 380). (P2 CP:231716)
 Added two new questions, Apply Treatment and Enforce Seam Adjustment to corner
feature selection criteria. For more information, see Selection Tab (Corner Feature
Properties Dialog Box) (on page 130). (P2 CP:164291)
 The property descriptions for Weld Class and Weld Item have been updated. For more
information, see Place Manual Physical Connections (on page 277). (P2 CP:214915)
 Added Routing Tab to Plate Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box. For more
information, see Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box (see "Plate Edge
Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box" on page 165). (P2 CP:305574)
 In those commands where you can sketch a curve or boundary, you can now modify the
sketch curve constraint values without going into the Draft 2D environment by using the
Constraint Table ribbon control. (P2 CP:305471)
 Copy by Family now copies topological points with any structure that uses the topological
points. Previously, the software only copied topological points created in 2D. For more
information, see Objects and behaviors supported for Copy by Family (on page 332) and
Objects and behaviors supported in Attribute Modify (on page 337). (P2 CP:244214)
 Added information about the 2D Symbol Logging Settings utility. For more information,
see 2D Symbol Logging Settings (on page 450). (P3 CP:299000)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 15

SECTION 1

Structural Detailing
The Structural Detailing task is used to add details to the basic structure created in Molded
Forms. Using this task, you create the following:
Detailed Parts
These parts are created from and replace the root parts created in the Molded Forms task.
Detailing uses the parent system’s properties, such as thickness, continuity, and molded
conventions, to create parts containing complete neat geometry, such as bevels, chamfers,
and detailed features.
Standalone Detailed Parts
These parts contain complete neat geometry, but do not have a parent Molded Forms
system. These parts are generally for secondary structures.
Assembly Connections
These connections are created automatically as children of logical connections for detailed
parts or as the root connection for secondary detailed parts. They contain connections
between parts, and maintain relationships between the generated parts resulting from
connection rules.
Physical Connections
These connections are created automatically as children of assembly connections. They
contain connection properties such as weld or bevel information.
You can start the Structural Detailing task by clicking Tasks > Structural Detailing. The
Structural Detailing task has these commands:

Select - Used to select objects in the model. For more information, see Selecting
Objects (on page 48).

Execute Detailing - Creates detail parts from the root part of a plate or profile
system. For more information, see Execute Detailing Command (on page 54).

Place Plate Parts - Places a standalone detailed planar plate. For more
information, see Place Plate Parts (on page 92).

Lapped Plate - Places a standalone lapped plate part. For more information,
see Lapped Plate (on page 101).

Place Bracket Parts - Creates a bracket plate part that reinforces other plate
parts. For more information, see Place Bracket Parts (on page 109).

Place Stiffener Profile Part by Intersection - Creates a standalone stiffener

profile part on the selected detailed plate part by defining the landing curve as
the intersection of the selected plate part and a grid plane. For more information,
see Place Stiffener Profile Part by Intersection (on page 120).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 16

Structural Detailing

Place Corner Feature - Places a planar curve from the catalog along a selected
edge, at a selected point on the edge, and coplanar to the face of a part. The
feature is applied to the part as a cutout. For more information, see Place Corner
Feature (on page 127).

Place Multiple Corner Features - Places a planar curve from the catalog at
each corner of a selected part. The features are applied to the part as cutouts.
For more information, see Place Multiple Corner Features (on page 132).

Place Edge Feature - Places a planar curve from the catalog along a selected
edge, at a selected point on the edge, and coplanar to the face of a part. The
feature is applied to the part as a cutout. For more information, see Place Edge
Feature (on page 134).

Place Edge Features at Seams - Places a planar curve from the catalog where
the edge of the part meets a seam. For more information, see Place Edge
Features at Seams (on page 142).

Place Edge Features by Offset - Places a series of edge features along an

edge at a specified offset distance. For more information, see Place Edge
Features by Offset (on page 144).

Place Sketched Features - Places a closed planar curve, either from the
catalog or sketched, coplanar to the face of a part. The feature is applied to the
part as a cutout, similar to a hole. For more information, see Place Sketched
Features (on page 148).

Place Edge Treatment - Specifies the characteristics of free edges. For more
information, see Place Edge Treatment (on page 155).

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - Places a standalone profile part along the
free edge of a plate part. For more information, see Profile Edge Reinforcement
Part (on page 168).

Plate Edge Reinforcement Part - Places a standalone lapped plate part around
a closed edge (such as an opening or sketched feature) of another plate part.
For more information, see Plate Edge Reinforcement Part (on page 162).

Straking Seam by Intersection - Creates a straking seam and splits the

selected detailed plate part by defining the landing curve as the intersection of
the selected plate part and a grid plane. For more information, see Straking
Seam by Intersection (on page 180).

Straking Seam by Offset - Creates a straking seam and splits the selected
detailed plate part by defining the landing curve as being offset from an existing
curve such as another seam, plate boundary, or reference plane. For more
information, see Straking Seam by Offset Command (on page 184).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 17

Structural Detailing

Straking Seam by Projection - Creates a straking seam and splits the selected
detailed plate part by projecting a 2D landing curve that you have sketched onto
the plate part. For more information, see Straking Seam by Projection Command
(on page 188).

Straking Seam by Table - Creates a straking seam and splits the selected
detailed plate part by defining the landing curve as coordinates in a table. For
more information, see Straking Seam by Table (on page 192).

Split Physical Connection - Splits an existing physical connection at a location

that you specify. For more information, see Split Physical Connection (on page
202).

Place Member Generic Assembly Connection - Places an assembly

connection between a built-up member part and an intersecting part. For more
information, see Place Member Generic Assembly Connection (on page 273).

Member Assembly Connections - Places an assembly connection at the

selected frame connection. Assembly connections define the necessary trimming
between member parts and provides for the generation of parts such as base
plates, gusset plates, and clip angles. Assembly connections also control
cutbacks, copes, notches, bolt holes, weld preparations, and slots. For more
information, see Place Assembly Connection (on page 357).

Place Manual Physical Connection - Creates a physical connection between

two parts. For more information, see Place Manual Physical Connections (on
page 277).

Place Manual Chamfer - Creates a manual chamfer between two detailed parts.
For more information, see Place Manual Chamfer (on page 374).

Board Management Service - Determines structural part and seam symmetry

about the center plane. This command is available on the Tools menu. For more
information, see Board Management Service (on page 377).

Board Assignment by Filter - Updates the symmetry of plate parts, profile

parts, seams, features, openings, and hole traces by using filters that you define
to select candidates and target objects. For more information, see Board
Assignment by Filter (on page 380).

Delay Settings - Specifies whether changes made in Molded Forms are

immediately updated in Structural Detailing. This command is available on the
Tools menu. For more information, see Delay Settings (Tools Menu) (on page
388).

Submit Batch Job - Runs batch processes using the Intergraph Batch Services
framework. This command is available on the Tools menu. For more
information, see Submit Batch Job (on page 383).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 18

Structural Detailing

Check Manufacturability - Analyzes pipes in the current workspace and reports

the objects that will be difficult or impossible to manufacture. This command is
available on the Tools menu. For more information, see Check Manufacturability
(on page 392).

See Also
Structural Detailing Workflow (on page 27)

Icons in the Workspace Explorer

Analysis Folder

Analysis Model

Assembly

Assembly Connection

Bearing Plate - not detailed

Bearing Plate - detailed

Bearing Plate - detailed, manufactured

Bearing Plate - group member

Bearing Plate - group member, manufactured

Bearing Plate - group master

Bearing Plate - group master, manufactured

Block

Boundary Condition

Bracket System or Leaf System

Bracket Part - not detailed

Bracket Part - detailed

Bracket Part - detailed, manufactured

Bracket Part - group member

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 19

Structural Detailing

Bracket Part - group member, manufactured

Bracket Part - group master

Bracket Part - group master, manufactured

Cable Nozzle on Equipment

Cabletray Nozzle on Equipment

Collar Plate - not detailed

Collar Plate - detailed

Collar Plate - detailed, manufactured

Collar Plate - group member

Collar Plate - group member, manufactured

Collar Plate - group master

Collar Plate - group master, manufactured

Common Part Manager

Common Part Group

Common Part Group and Manufactured

Common Part Group and Standard

Common Part Group, Standard and Manufactured

Common Part Group and Out of Date

Common Part Folder

Common Part Folder Unique Parts

Common Part Folder Unique Parts Out of Date

Conduit Nozzle on Equipment

Coordinate System

Coordinate System Axis

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 20

Structural Detailing

Coordinate System Grid Plane

Coordinate System Elevation Plane

Coordinate System Radial Plane

Coordinate System Radial Cylinder

Curved Member Part - not detailed

Curved Member Part - light

Curved Member Part - light, manufactured

Curved Member Part - detailed

Curved Member Part - detailed, manufactured

Curved Member Part - group member

Curved Member Part - group member, manufactured

Curved Member Part - group master

Curved Member Part - group master, manufactured

Designed Equipment Component

Designed Equipment

Designed Handrail

Designed Member - not detailed

Designed Member - light

Designed Member - light, manufactured

Designed Member - detailed

Designed Member - detailed, manufactured

Designed Member - group member

Designed Member - group member, manufactured

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 21

Structural Detailing

Designed Member - group master

Designed Member - group master, manufactured

Edge Treatment

Equipment

Equipment Component

Equipment Foundation

Equipment Shape

Equipment Solid

Equipment Solid - Added

Equipment Solid - Subtracted

Equipment Solid - Suppressed

Feature (includes corner feature, edge feature, face feature, slot, and so on)

Footing

Footing Components

Foundation Port

Frame Connection

Handrail

HVAC Nozzle on equipment

Insert Plate - not detailed

Insert Plate - detailed

Insert Plate - detailed, manufactured

Insert Plate - group member

Insert Plate - group member, manufactured

Insert Plate - group master

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 22

Structural Detailing

Insert Plate - group master, manufactured

Ladder

Linear Member Part - not detailed

Linear Member Part - light

Linear Member Part - light, manufactured

Linear Member Part - detailed

Linear Member Part - detailed, manufactured

Linear Member Part - group member

Linear Member Part - group member, manufactured

Linear Member Part - group master

Linear Member Part - group master, manufactured

Load Case

Load Combination

Member Assembly Connection Cutback Feature

Member Assembly Connection Plate Part

Member Assembly Connection

Member Fireproofing

Member Part

Member Split Connection

Member System

Opening

Panel - manufactured

Physical Connection

Pipe Nozzle on Equipment

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 23

Structural Detailing

Planning Joint - butt weld

Planning Joint - lap weld

Planning Joint - tee weld

Planning Joint Folder

Plate Part - not detailed

Plate Part - light

Plate Part - light, manufactured

Plate Part - detailed

Plate Part - detailed, manufactured

Plate Part - detailed, manufactured, with manufacturing part assembly child

Plate Part - group member

Plate Part - group member, manufactured

Plate Part - group master

Plate Part - group master, manufactured

Plate System or leaf system

Profile Edge Reinforcement System or Leaf System

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - light

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - light, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part detailed, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member, manufactured

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 24

Structural Detailing

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master, manufactured

Seam - Design

Seam - Intersection

Seam - Planning

Seam - Straking

Slab Assembly Connection

Slab

Stair

Standalone Plate Part - not detailed

Standalone Plate Part - detailed

Standalone Plate Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - group member

Standalone Plate Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - group master

Standalone Plate Part - group master, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - not detailed

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master, manufactured

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 25

Structural Detailing

Standalone Stiffener Part - not detailed

Standalone Stiffener Part - detailed

Standalone Stiffener Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - group member

Standalone Stiffener Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - group master

Standalone Stiffener Part - group master, manufactured

Stiffener Part - not detailed

Stiffener Part - light

Stiffener Part - light, manufactured

Stiffener Part - detailed

Stiffener Part - detailed, manufactured

Stiffener Part - group member

Stiffener Part - group member, manufactured

Stiffener Part - group master

Stiffener Part - group master, manufactured

Stiffener System or Leaf System

Wall Assembly Connection

Wall Part

Wall Run

Wall System

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 26

SECTION 2

Structural Detailing Workflow

All structural detailing objects are placed in the model using information inherited from molded
forms systems or defined in the structural detailing reference data. The first step should be to
review, edit, and otherwise customize the delivered structural detailing reference data. This step
is usually performed by an administrator or specialized user before modeling starts.
Structural detailing occurs after structural design has been completed or has progressed to a
predefined stage. In the software, structural detailing is performed on molded forms systems, so
molded forms objects must be placed first.

Execute Detailing on Systems

When you detail plate and profile systems, the software replaces root parts with detailed parts.
As parts are detailed, additional detailing objects are automatically created, such as assembly
connections, physical connections, plate chamfers, profile end cuts, and slots and collars for
profiles penetrating plates. These objects are defined as smart occurrences by rules in the
reference data and can be individually modified after creation.

Modify Smart Occurrence Objects

Optionally, after parts have been detailed, smart occurrence objects can be modified by
changing values on Properties dialog boxes:
 Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 410)
 Slot Properties Dialog Box (on page 412)
 Collar Properties Dialog Box (on page 413)
 Free End Cut Properties Dialog Box (on page 416)
 Web Cut Properties Dialog Box (on page 418)
 Flange Cut Properties Dialog Box (on page 420)
 Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 422)
 Chamfer Properties Dialog Box (on page 429)

Place Secondary Parts

Create standalone plate and profile parts. In general, these parts are of secondary strength
importance and include objects such as headers, brackets, and doublers. You can place several
types of secondary parts:
 Place Plate Parts (on page 92)
 Lapped Plate (on page 101)
 Place Bracket Parts (on page 109)
 Place Stiffener Profile Part by Intersection (on page 120)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 27

Structural Detailing Workflow

Place Features
After parts have been detailed, add features. You can place several types of features:
 Place Corner Feature (on page 127)
 Place Edge Feature (on page 134)
 Place Sketched Features (on page 148)

Place Straking Seams

Place straking seams as needed. Straking seams are used to break plate parts into practical
sizes, restricted by what can be purchased, work center limitations, or other fabrication
considerations. You have several methods for placing seams:
 Straking Seam by Intersection (on page 180)
 Straking Seam by Offset Command (on page 184)
 Straking Seam by Projection Command (on page 188)
 Straking Seam by Table (on page 192)

Place Edge Reinforcement

Place edge reinforcement parts as needed. You have two methods for placing edge
reinforcement parts:
 Plate Edge Reinforcement Part (on page 162)
 Profile Edge Reinforcement Part (on page 168)

Copy in Structural Detailing

You can use the data created in Structural Detailing with Model Data Reuse and
Model Data Transform, including the Delete Optional functionality.
See Also
Structural Detailing (on page 16)

Plane Methods
You must often define planes used for object surfaces and sketching planes. Usually, but not
necessarily, these planes are based from an existing plate or from a grid or reference plane
created using the Grids task. The following methods define planes:
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.
Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 28

Structural Detailing Workflow

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

What do you want to do?

 Define a coincident plane (on page 29)
 Define an offset plane (on page 30)
 Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 31)
 Define a plane using three points (on page 31)

Define a coincident plane

1. Click By Plane or Offset Plane .
In Hole Management, click Coincident Plane .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, select a reference plane, a grid plane, or a planar
plate system.
A preview of the selected plane displays. The local coordinate system of the plane displays
at the plane's center.

 You create reference planes in the Grids task by selecting Ship in the Grid Type box of the
Grid Wizard. For this plane method, you can select reference planes in the Workspace
Explorer or in a graphic view.

 You create grid planes in the Grids task by selecting Grids in the Grid Type box of the Grid
Wizard. For this plane method, you can best select grid planes in the Workspace Explorer.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 29

Structural Detailing Workflow

 For more information, see Create Coordinate System (Grid Wizard) in the Grids User's
Guide.

Define an offset plane

1. Click By Plane or Offset Plane .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, select the base plane from which to offset the new
plane. The base plane can be a reference plane, a grid plane, or a planar plate system.
A preview of the selected plane displays. The local coordinate system of the plane displays
at the plane's center.

3. In the Offset box, type the offset distance from the plane and press TAB.
The plane moves to the new location.
-OR-
4. Graphically define the offset:
a. Click Offset Lock .
The option changes to unlocked .
b. Move the pointer to the required location and click.
The plane and plane coordinate system move to the new location, Offset Lock
changes to locked , and the offset value displays in the Offset box.
c. If an adjustment to the offset is needed, type a new value in the Offset box.
5. To move the plane independent of its previous definition, see Move a defined plane.

 You can graphically define the offset with the best precision by also using PinPoint. For
more information, see PinPoint in the Common User's Guide.
 By moving the pointer back and forth over the base plane in the graphic view, you can
change the offset direction. You can also change the direction by changing the sign in the
Offset box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 30

Solve Ambiguity
If the boundaries that you selected can form the object in more than one way, then you have
defined an ambiguous solution. The software prompts you to select one or more solutions.

What do you want to do?

 Pick boundaries (on page 33)
 Use the Boundary List dialog box (on page 33)
 Define a boundary curve (on page 34)
 Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 34)
 Modify plate boundaries using Boundary List
 Rebound objects

Pick boundaries
1. Click Pick Boundaries .
2. In a graphic view or Workspace Explorer, select an object or grid plane to use as a
boundary.
3. Continue selecting objects or grid planes until you have completed defining the boundaries
for the object.
To remove an object from the group of boundaries, select the object again.

Use the Boundary List dialog box

1. On the command ribbon, click Boundary List .
The Boundary List dialog box displays.
2. To remove a boundary, select the boundary in the list, and then click Remove .

3. To remove all boundaries, click Remove All .

4. To add a new boundary, click Add , and then select a boundary in the graphic view or in
the Workspace Explorer. You can also type the boundary name and an optional offset
value in the Offset box or the Name box.
For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 44).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 33

Structural Detailing Workflow

Define a boundary curve

1. Select Boundary Curve .
2. Define the sketching plane for the curve.
Define a coincident plane (on page 29)
Define an offset plane (on page 30)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 31)
Define a plane using three points (on page 31)

3. Click Add Intersecting Item .

4. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the 2D environment.
5. Click Add Projection Item .
6. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane and that you want to
use as reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and
appear in the 2D environment.
7. Select Auto to automatically add all related objects to the select set, if needed.
8. Click Sketch 2D .
The 2D environment appears.
9. In the 2D environment, sketch the boundary.
You can constrain the boundary to geometric construction points referenced from
profile cross-section key points or offset from plate systems. For more information, see Point
at Offset from Keypoint Command and Point at Minimum Distance Command in the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Drawing Editor Help, available within the 2D environment.
10. Click Finish in the 2D environment.
The 3D environment and the main command ribbon return.
Deleting a boundary curve from the 2D environment also removes it from the
Boundary List dialog box.

Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries

The command switches to Solve Ambiguity automatically if an ambiguous solution exists
after clicking Accept or Finish. All possible solutions created by the selected boundaries
appear in the graphic view.
1. Move the pointer over a solution, and then click to select it.
2. Continue to select solutions until you have defined the entire bounded object. A correct
solution to ambiguity meets these conditions:
 Each solution must have a common edge with at least one other solution.
 Each boundary must be used by at least one solution.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 34

Structural Detailing Workflow

 To modify the ambiguous solution after creating an object, select Solve Ambiguity , and
select new solutions.
 To remove a previously-selected solution, select the solution again.
 Pressing the SHIFT key selects the Pick Edges option after you have selected a boundary
plate. Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.

Sketch 2D Best Practices

The Sketch 2D option is used in several commands to create sketched boundaries,
openings, curves for extruded plate systems, and profile and seam landing curves. The following
Sketch 2D best practices help you create objects in Molded Forms that you detail in the
Structural Detailing task and manufacture in the Structural Manufacturing task.

Templates
Sketch 2D default display options are saved in the file [Product
Folder]\Common2D\Symbol2D\Templates\[Link]. You can change the default display by
changing options in this file:
1. Right-click [Link] and select Properties.
2. Clear Read-only and click OK.
3. Open [Link] and change any of the following default display options:
 File > Properties. You can change the units displayed in command ribbon bars on the
Units tab.
 View > Toolbars. You can select the toolbars that are displayed.
 Format > Dimensions. You can change the units used in dimensions, the text size, and
other dimension properties.
 Tools > Options. You can change the default colors on the Colors tab.
 Tools > Display Manager. You can change the default geometry color, line type, and
width for individual layers.
 Tools > SmartSketch Settings. You can select the SmartSketch relationships that are
enabled on the Relationships tab.
4. Save and close the file.

Fractional Units
The default units and precision values in Sketch 2D are defined in a 3D task. For example, if the
file [Product Folder]\Common2D\Symbol2D\Templates\[Link] has default units set to

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 35

Structural Detailing Workflow

mm, and the units of measure in Molded Forms are set to ft-in, Sketch 2D defines the units of
measurement as ft-in.
The Properties dialog box in Sketch 2D allows you to view the defined units of measurement
and to specify the fractional precision value. If you need to use a specific fractional precision
value for all tasks in Sketch 2D, you can specify the precision value in the template file, which
takes precedence over the precision value defined by the 3D task.
The following example shows how to modify the length readout precision to 1/64 in the template
file:
1. In the Molded Forms task, click Tools > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Under Units of Measure, set the distance readout to ft-in (fractional), and set the precision
value to 1/64.
3. Click OK.
The distance units in Sketch 2D are now in ft-in with a precision value of 1/64.

Number of sketch files allowed per plate

Sketch 2D geometry for an object is saved in 2D files cached in the model and related to the
object.
The Boundary Curve step for the plate system commands uses one 2D file. All boundary
curves are in one 2D file for each plate system, and are modified, added, or deleted in the same
file.

The Place Opening , Stiffener Profile System by 2D Projection , and Design Seam by
2D Sketch commands can each have:
 Multiple 2D files, with a separate file for each object on one plate system. The objects are
modified in the 2D file, and deleted from the graphic view or Workspace Explorer.
 Geometry for multiple objects in one 2D file. The objects are modified or deleted in the 2D
file.
 One 2D file that applies to multiple plate systems. Changes to the 2D file are reflected on all
plate systems.
 A combination of these files.

Add items to sketch

The Add Intersecting Item and Add Projection Item steps are used to add reference
structure to Sketch 2D. Select the minimum number of needed items.
More than 30 items added to a sketch file can slow down software performance when
the object is recomputed.
Next, you can select Auto to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to the current select set. Items that pass the criteria are added to the select set and
are highlighted in the graphic view, as well as the Workspace Explorer.
The filter criteria that the software uses to determine eligible candidates depend upon whether
Add Intersecting Item or Add Projection Item was selected in a previous step. The following

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 36

Structural Detailing Workflow

table lists the various relevant objects that are automatically imported based on the target, or
base sketch, object type.

Base Sketch Object Intersecting Objects Projecting Objects

Plate System  Stiffeners  Reference Curves

 Edge Reinforcements  Stiffeners
 Seams  Penetration Plates
 Bounded Objects
 Bounding Objects
 Knuckle Reference Curves

Plate Part None supported in the current version of None supported in the current version
the software of the software

Profile System None supported in the current version of None supported in the current version
the software of the software

Member None supported in the current version of None supported in the current version
the software of the software

Designed Member (Built Up) Same as Plate System Same as Plate System

If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a message on the status bar.
If you clear Auto, all selected objects, whether added to the select set automatically or
manually, are cleared. Selecting Auto adds back those objects that initially passed the filter
criteria, but it does not add back any objects that you selected manually.
When the selected plate system is large, Auto automatically adds all objects
relative to the sketch in the context of intersecting or project. This can slow down software
performance.

Layers
The software automatically defines several layers in Sketch 2D. Reference items (selected
automatically by the software or manually using the Add Intersecting Item and Add
Projection Item steps) are placed on those layers:

Default Layer
The software only uses geometry that you create on the Default layer. You can put other
geometry, such as construction lines, on other layers. The Default layer must be the first layer
alphabetically. To avoid a conflict, you should add a "z" prefix to any layer which you add, such
as "z_construction."

Infinite Elements Layer

Contains reference items with infinite geometry intersecting the sketch plane, such as grid
planes. Objects on this layer can be used with dimensions and relationships.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 37

Structural Detailing Workflow

Inputs Layer
Contains other reference items intersecting the sketch plane that can also be used with
dimensions and relationships. The reference geometry includes openings, design seams, plate
systems, and profile systems.

No_Constrained_Elements Layer
Contains reference items that do not intersect the sketch plane. Also contains reference items
that cannot be used with relationships and dimensions, such as plate and profile parts. By
default, you cannot select reference geometry on the No_Constrained_Elements layer. To
make the geometry selectable, you must make No_Constrained_Elements the active layer,
and then switch back to the Default layer.
You can add relationships and dimensions to reference geometry on the
No_Constrained_Elements layer, but the relationships are not saved when you click Finish.

Multiple reference planes

You can add reference planes to Sketch 2D that are different than the sketching plane, but
parallel to the sketching plane. This is useful in defining landing curves for projected profiles and
seams on the hull. Use Add Projection Item to add the reference planes.

The additional reference plane intersection geometry is gray in color and placed on the
No_Constrained_Elements layer.

Using SmartSketch Drawing Editor to save sketch geometry

SmartSketch Drawing Editor, delivered to [Product Folder]\Shape2D\Bin\[Link],
can be used to save geometry commonly used in Sketch 2D, such as:
 Mother curves and extrusion curves for extruded plate systems.
 Boundary curves.
 Openings or sketched features not included in the Catalog.
 Landing curves for projected profiles and seams.
You can copy the geometry from Sketch 2D and paste it into SmartSketch Drawing Editor, or
create the geometry directly in SmartSketch Drawing Editor. Geometry can be saved in multiple

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 38

Structural Detailing Workflow

SmartSketch Drawing Editor files or into a single file with multiple sheets. The geometry can be
copied from SmartSketch Drawing Editor and pasted into Sketch 2D as needed.

Deleting reference geometry

You can delete reference geometry from the sketch when the software includes geometry that
you do not want to see. The reference structure is not deleted, and the reference geometry is
recreated the next time that you open the sketch.

Modifying groups of geometry

The software automatically groups Sketch 2D geometry when you click Finish. When you
modify the existing 2D geometry of an object, you must maintain the original group identifier by
using the following methods:
1. To modify or delete existing geometry, use QuickPick, Top Down or Bottom Up
with Select Tool to select the geometry instead of the group.
2. To add new geometry to a group, use Edit > Group Modify.
3. To replace all geometry in a group with geometry copied to the clipboard, use Replace
Group Elements .

Rectangles
Use Line or Line/Arc Continuous to create rectangles.
If you use Rectangle , you must select Tools > Maintain Relationships. Right-click the
geometry, and then select Convert. This converts the rectangle into four lines and the correct
connection relationships are created at the corners.

Constraints
Use relationships and dimensions to constrain geometry to reference structure. This keeps the
geometry properly related to the reference structure if the reference structure changes.
Keep relationships and dimensions as simple as possible. This allows the geometry the best
chance to update if the reference structure changes.

Connections
Connection relationships are required for the software to create connected geometry.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 39

Structural Detailing Workflow

Do not create a connection between the corner of the sketched geometry, and the corner of the
bounding object. Instead, move the constraint slightly off the corner.
Good: All endpoints of opening are connected.

Bad: Missing connection at one corner causes the creation of the opening to fail.

Good: All endpoints of extrusion curve are connected.

Bad: Missing connection on extrusion curve.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 40

Structural Detailing Workflow

Plate system is missing part of the curve.

Extending sketch geometry to intersect bounding structure

Extend sketch geometry beyond bounding reference structure geometry to ensure that the
sketch geometry intersects the reference structure at all locations.
Good:

Extrusion curve extends beyond the hull. Bracket boundary curve extends
beyond the top flange and the
bottom of the bottom flange.

Bad:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 41

Structural Detailing Workflow

Overlapping sketch geometry for boundary curves

A boundary curve with all geometry connected is treated as one edge in the Graphics View. You
may sometimes want parts of the curve to be treated as separate edges at sharp discontinuities
such as corners. This allows you to add edge reinforcements in the Molded Forms task or edge
treatments in the Structural Detailing task to part of the boundary curve without defining
additional boundaries. In order to separate the boundary curve into separate edges, overlap the
boundary curve geometry instead of connecting it at the corners:

Creating boundary curves on the thickness side of a plate

If your plate boundaries include a plate system with the thickness direction towards the plate
that you are creating, a profile mounted to the bounding plate system and a sketched boundary,
and then the boundary curve must intersect both the profile system and profile part.
In the following example:
 The solid blue line is the molded surface of the bounding plate system.
 The dashed blue line is the thickness direction for the bounding plate part.
 The dashed gray profile outline is the bounding profile system mounted to the bounding
plate system at the molded surface (on the No_Constrained_Elements layer).
 The dashed blue profile outline is the bounding profile part mounted to the thickened
bounding plate part.
 The solid black line is the intended boundary curve intersecting the profile part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 42

Structural Detailing Workflow

 The solid red line is the required adjustment to the boundary curve, passing through both
the profile part and profile system, and intersecting the profile system.

The black line is the intended boundary curve. It can be constrained to the dashed blue profile
part using relationships and dimensions. The red lines are additional geometry that must
connect to the black boundary curve, pass through the profile part geometry, and intersect the
dashed grey profile system geometry.

Arcs in boundary curves

If a boundary curve ends with a circular or elliptical arc, you must add a line segment pointing
away from the direction of the arc. This prevents the arc from extending back onto the boundary
curve as the curve is calculated.
In the following example, the black curves are the intended boundary curve. The red line is the
extension to the boundary curve that prevents the arc from extending back onto the boundary
curve.

Multiple curves
Do not create a close boundary curve contour that overlaps trimming input geometry. Instead,
draw two separate curves. In the following example, there are two separate curves, one for
corner feature and one for diagonal boundary.

1 - Corner feature curve

2 - Diagonal boundary curve

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 43

Structural Detailing Workflow

Associative offsets
The Associative Offset command allows you to create a curve based on an existing curve, and
place the new curve at a specified offset. To use this command, you must add it to a toolbar.
1. Right-click an existing toolbar, and click Toolbars.
2. Click Customize on the Toolbars dialog box.
3. Click Manipulation on the Categories list.
4. Drag the Associative Offset icon from the Buttons list to an existing toolbar.
For more information on the Associative Offset command see the Associative Offset
Command topics in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor help file.

Boundary List Dialog Box

Displays the boundaries for the object that you are placing:
 Model objects, such as plate systems and profile systems. You can also bound profiles by
plate edges, other profiles, and seams.
 Reference planes and other plane definitions.
 Sketched boundary curves created using the Sketch 2D option on a supported ribbon.
Boundary curves are prefixed with SketchGroup_.
 A standalone plane created during a copy, move, or mirror operation when a boundary was
not included in the operation. You can replace the standalone plane with a new boundary.

Open this dialog box by clicking Boundary List on the command ribbon during the
boundary definition step.

Tools > Options defines the Highlight color. For more information, see Colors Tab (Options
Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
Preview Type
This option applies only to plates.
Each selected boundary highlights in the graphic view according to the selected preview
type.
In the following examples, two plate systems, a reference plane, and a sketched boundary
are the selected boundaries of the vertical plate.
Bounding Objects - Highlights the selected boundary object as an outline. Reference

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 44

Structural Detailing Workflow

planes display as translucent shaded planes.

Bounding Geometry - Highlights the internal boundary geometry used by the software. The
internal geometry is typically an unlimited length line for model objects and reference plane
boundaries.

Edges - Highlights edges of the bounded object where the bounded object intersects with

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 45

Structural Detailing Workflow

the selected boundary.

For Bounding Objects and Bounding Geometry, the complete sketched

boundary curve geometry displays as drawn in Sketch 2D , as shown in the following
example.

Add
Specifies a new boundary. You can select a boundary in the graphic view or the Workspace
Explorer.

 You can also type the boundary name and an optional offset value in the Name box or
the Offset box, and then press TAB or ENTER.
 Invalid text displays with a gray background in the Name box or the Offset box.
 A profile has a maximum of two boundaries, but a plate edge boundary displays on two
rows of the boundary list. Both the plate edge and the edge's parent plate system
display in the list.

 The boundary list holds a maximum of two items. If you click Add with two items
already in the list, Smart 3D removes the first list item, and then adds the new item to
the bottom of the list.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 46

Structural Detailing Workflow

 When you select a boundary in the list and Smart 3D has computed the landing curve,
the software highlights the end point of the profile with a red star.

 If you modify a row with a new boundary or offset, Smart 3D maintains the existing
relationships of the previous boundary. This maintains manual end cuts, corner
features, and manual logical connections. Manual logical connections go on the To Do
List if the other profile no longer touches the modified profile.
Remove
Removes the selected boundary from the list.

 Deleting a boundary curve from the 2D environment (Sketch 2D on the main

command ribbon) also removes it from the Boundary List dialog box.
 Do not use the DELETE key to remove boundaries. DELETE removes sketched
boundaries but does not remove bounding reference planes or reference objects.

Clear All
Removes all boundaries from the list.

/ Disconnect
Removes the relationships of a boundary to its definition method. When you disconnect a
boundary, it becomes a standalone plane. This option is active by default for a standalone
plane created during a copy, move, or mirror operation.
After disconnecting a boundary, you must select a replacement boundary in the
graphic view or the Workspace Explorer.

Extend Sketch Boundary in Graphic View

Extends a sketched boundary to a point in space or to another element selected in the
graphic view. This option is available when you select a sketched boundary (with a name
prefixed with SketchGroup_).
Name
Specifies the name of a boundary.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 47

Structural Detailing Workflow

Offset
Specifies an offset distance from the boundary. You can type the following formats for offset
values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m
Invalid text displays with a gray background in the Name box or the Offset box.
Apply
This option applies only to plates.
Displays a preview of the boundaries in the graphic view.
Gaps between boundaries display with a glyph.

The glyph uses the Handle color defined in Tools > Options. For more information, see
Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
OK
Closes the dialog box and saves the boundary changes.
To cancel boundary changes, you can click OK and then exit the parent
command without clicking Finish. You can also select the northwest arrow to close the
boundary list dialog box without saving the changes.
See Also
Use the Boundary List dialog box (on page 33)

Selecting Objects
All objects in the Structural Detailing task have properties that you can edit. Using the Select
command on the vertical toolbar, you select the object to edit or work with.

An important part of the Select command is the Locate Filter box that appears on the ribbon.
The Locate Filter box contains the available, predefined filters for the Select command. When

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 48

Structural Detailing Workflow

you choose a filter in the Locate Filter box, the software allows you to select only the filtered
objects in a graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer. For example, if you select Seams,
you can select only seams in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
The Structural Detailing task includes these filters:
Assembly Connections/Free End Cuts
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to assembly
connections or free end cuts.
Beam Parts
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to beam parts.
Control Points
Limits the selection of items to control points.
Construction Graphics
Limits the selection of items to construction graphics.
Features
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to manually-placed
and automatically-generated features. Manually placed features include corner features,
edge features, and sketched features. Automatically placed features include slots, collars
and clips, and chamfers.
Physical Connections
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to physical
connections.
Physical Connections Split Point
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to physical connection
split points.
Plate Parts
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to plate parts.
Profile Edge Reinforcement Parts
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to profile edge
reinforcement parts.
Seams
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to straking seams.
Stiffener Parts
Limits your selection in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to stiffener parts.
Struct Detailing Entities
Allows you to select plate parts, stiffeners parts, beam parts, profile edge reinforcement
parts, seams, features, assembly connections, and physical connections in a graphic view
and in the Workspace Explorer. Objects placed using other tasks, such as pieces of
equipment, cannot be selected using this filter.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 49

Structural Detailing Workflow

All
Allows you to select any object, even objects created in another task.

Inside Fence
Selects all objects entirely inside the fence.

Inside/Overlapping Fence
Selects all objects entirely inside the fence and those objects outside but touching the fence
at some point.

Split Notification
When a seam is added, deleted, or modified, the plate or profile systems and parts split by the
seam are affected. The software notifies different tasks to transfer attributes and objects to the
new systems and parts. The Molded Forms, Structural Detailing, Planning, Hole Management,
and Structural Manufacturing tasks are affected by split notification.
The software uses split notification when:
 A design or planning seam is added and Execute Split is run in the Molded Forms task.
 A design or planning seam that has already been split is deleted or modified in the Molded
Forms task.
 An intersection seam is added and split when Execute Split is run in the Molded Forms
task.
 A profile or plate system creating an intersection seam is deleted or modified in the Molded
Forms task.
 A planning seam is added when Manage Block Intersections is run and an
intersecting part is set to Split or Offset in the Planning task.
 A planning seam is deleted when Manage Block Intersections is run and an
intersecting part is set to Intersected or Assigned in the Planning task.
 A planning seam is modified when the cutting plane of a block is modified in the Planning
task.

Identifying Seams in Workspace Explorer

You can identify the type of seam in the Workspace Explorer by the icon.

 Design seams

 Planning seams

 Straking seams

 Intersection seams

What do you want to do?

 Add a seam (on page 51)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 50

Structural Detailing Workflow

 Delete a seam (on page 52)

 Modify a seam when leaf systems are not added or removed (on page 53)

Add a seam
If you split a leaf system and its part with a new seam, the software creates new leaf systems
and parts for each split, and deletes the original leaf system.
Molded Forms properties and material information are transferred to the new systems. The
default naming rule is used to name the new leaf systems. Logical connections that cross the
split are replaced by two new connections with the same properties.

If the part is detailed, Structural Detailing properties and features are transferred to the new
parts. The software creates new assembly and physical connections using properties from the
previous connections.

If a seam intersects an existing Structural Detailing feature, the feature is transferred to one of
the parts.

If a split passes through a hole trace, the software applies the cut to all the parts (with a single
hole feature). The hole feature is placed under the root plate system. If the split does not pass

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 51

Structural Detailing Workflow

through the hole trace, then the software applies the cut only to the part containing the hole
trace and places the hole feature under the plate part.

The structural hole fittings in the Hole Management task are placed on the To Do List only if a
split passes through a hole trace.
If a split passes through an edge feature definition point, the software creates two edge features.
If the split does not pass through the definition point, then only the part containing the definition
point contains an edge feature.

Block and assembly assignments in the Planning task are transferred. New parts are in the
same assembly or block as the original part.
Manufacturing parts are updated using the Manufacturing Service Manager.
Connections to ladders, stairs, handrails, members, hangers, and equipment are transferred to
the new part.

Delete a seam
If you delete or rebound a seam, the software deletes leaf systems and parts and creates new
leaf system and parts.
Molded Forms properties and material information are transferred from the first system (as
defined by the software) to the new system. The default naming rule is used to name the new
leaf system. Logical connections that crossed the split are replaced by a new connection with
the same properties as the first system.
Structural Detailing properties and features are transferred to the new part. If one part is detailed
and the other is not, the new part is detailed.

Hole features are transferred to the new part. The parent system of a hole feature is:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 52

Structural Detailing Workflow

 A plate part if a cut is applied only to a single part.

 A root plate system if the cuts are applied to multiple plate parts.
The structural hole fittings in the Hole Management task are placed on the To Do List only if a
split passes through a hole trace.
Block and assembly assignments in the Planning task are transferred. If the original parts were
in the same assembly or block, then the new part is placed in that assembly or block. If the
original parts were in different assemblies, then the new part is placed in the assembly last used
by split notification.
Manufacturing parts are updated using the Manufacturing Service Manager.
Connections to ladders, stairs, handrails, members, hangers, and equipment are transferred to
the new part.

Modify a seam when leaf systems are not added or removed

If you move a seam and the existing systems and parts are modified instead of replaced, then
the software does not use split notification. Hole features are not transferred from one part to
another, and are placed on the To Do List. If a Hole feature is on one part and a seam is later
modified so that it crosses the hole feature, the hole feature is still on one part. Split notification
is not used when a seam is modified.

 If you move a seam and the existing systems and parts are modified instead of replaced,
then the software does not use split notification. Structural Detailing features are not
transferred from one part to another, and are placed on the To Do List. If a feature is on
one part and a seam is later modified so that it crosses the feature, the feature is still on one
part. Split notification is not used when a seam is modified.
 Split notification works with design seams from Molded Forms as well as with planning
seams.
 If there are multiple features on one sketch, the software creates two sketches after the split;
one for each part. Constraints associated with a sketched feature only go with one sketch
after the split. You must manually add the constraints to the other sketch.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 53

SECTION 3

Execute Detailing Command

The Execute Detailing command creates detail parts from the root part of a plate, profile, or
member system. The command requires you to select one or more blocks, assemblies,
systems, sub-systems, or root parts. You can select built-up members for detailing, but you
cannot select rolled members. You can select the objects from the model, or from the
Workspace Explorer.
Objects can be selected for detailing both before and after launching the Execute Detailing
command. Only valid items are added to the list and are highlighted in yellow, and invalid
commands are filtered out.
After you run the Execute Detailing command, the icon for the object changes in the
Workspace Explorer. For more information, see Icons in the Workspace Explorer (on page 19).
When parts are created in the Molded Forms task, those parts are trimmed to the molded
surfaces of the part's boundaries. Parts in this initial state are referred to as light parts. The
Execute Detailing command transforms the light parts to production definition and accuracy by
considering the thickness, orientation, and connection information of the bounding objects. Parts
in this advanced state are referred to as detailed parts. In addition to the thickness based
trimming, other objects, such as assembly and physical connections, slots, collars, end cuts,
and chamfers are automatically created. These additional objects are either incorporated in the
detail part, or become related to the detailed part, as appropriate.
The software trims a detail part based on its bounding objects. After a bounding object has been
detailed, the resulting detail part boundary is trimmed to the face of the bounding detail part,
which means the boundary is adjusted by the thickness of the bounding detail part. If the
bounding object has not been detailed (that is, the Execute Detailing command has not been
run for its root part), then the resulting detail part boundary is trimmed to the bounding parent
plate system surface. When you run Execute Detailing against the bounding root part, the
boundary of the bounded detail part is adjusted as required by the molded thickness direction
and the thickness of the bounding detail part.
As parts are detailed, additional detailing objects are created as smart occurrences by rules in
the reference data and can be individually modified after creation. Assembly and physical
connections are created for both parts associated with a connection. Free end cuts are created
at the ends of unbounded profiles or members. If you have run Execute Split in the Molded
Forms task, the software automatically creates slot and collar features where stiffeners
penetrate plates, end cuts on profiles, and chamfers at design seams where plate thickness
change by a specified amount. The default values of smart occurrence objects cannot be
modified with the Execute Detailing command, but can be modified after creation by selecting
the object and modifying the properties of the object.
If you select a detailed part and click Delete, the software removes the detailing from that part.
If you have run Execute Detailing for only one of the root parts, then the software does not
create the assembly and physical connections or any applicable features. For example, if you
run Execute Detailing for a root part that is penetrated by a stiffener that has not had Execute
Detailing run, then the assembly and physical connections for the penetration are not created,
and thus the slot and collar or clip features created by the assembly connection are also not
created. When you run Execute Detailing for the penetrating root part, the assembly

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 54

Execute Detailing Command

connection at the penetration is created. The software then creates the slot on the penetrated
detail part.
The generated detail parts inherit their properties from the parent plate or profile system.
Straking seams can only be placed on detail parts. Therefore, you must run Execute
Detailing before you can place straking seams.

Execute Detailing Ribbon

Displays the controls used to generate detail parts.

Select objects for detailing

Select the objects from which to generate detail parts. You can select the objects in a
graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Finish
Creates the detail parts using the parameters that you have defined.
Plate Systems and Parts Only
Excludes profiles from the parts that the software processes. If you select this option before
you select parts, the software prevents you from selecting profile objects. If you select this
option before you click Finish, the software excludes any profiles that are in your selected
objects from processing.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Propagate changes
In addition to detailing the selected objects, other parts affected by the detailing are also
changed. If many parts are affected, propagation can significantly impact processing time.
Do not propagate changes
Only the selected objects are detailed. Other parts affected by the detailing are not changed,
keeping processing time to a minimum.

 You can select plate or profile parts by default in a graphic view, or from the Workspace
Explorer.
 You can select planning blocks by default in a graphic view, or from the Workspace
Explorer.
 You can select plate or profile systems and sub systems in the Workspace Explorer or
by using QuickPick in a graphic view. Execute Detailing details all child parts.
 You can select planning blocks and assemblies in the Workspace Explorer or by using
QuickPick in a graphic view. Execute Detailing details all assigned parts.
 Select the Plate Systems & Parts Only option to exclude profiles from the objects that
you can select.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 55

 LC# Logical Connection

 LC#' - Sub Logical Connection

Topics
Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along...................59
Tube End to Tube End - Co-Linear Axis .......................................63
Tube to Tube - Axis Along ...........................................................65
Designed Member to Designed Member ......................................67
Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along...................68
Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along...................68
Designed Member to Designed Member - I Seated ......................69
Vertical Brace or Gap ..................................................................70
Rolled I to Built Up I .....................................................................70
Designed Member to Rolled I.......................................................71
Designed Member to Plate ..........................................................72
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90° Center ..........................................73
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Center...................74
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Opposite Connect Points ..............75
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Opposite Connect Points
....................................................................................................76
Split Built Up by Grid - Perpendicular ...........................................77
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Overlapping Connect Points..........78
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Partial Penetration.79
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Penetration ...................................80
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Penetration ...........81
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Rotation of Member ......................82
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Split Both ......................................83
Can - Horizontal Beam ................................................................84
Can - Vertical Column..................................................................84
Can - Continuous Leg ..................................................................85
Can - Multiple Braces ..................................................................86
Can - Diameter Change ...............................................................86
Can - Single Axis Gap .................................................................87
Can - Multiple Braces ..................................................................89
Can - Cone Transition..................................................................89
Can - Beam and Column End Point .............................................90
Can - Beam and Column Intersection ..........................................91

Designed Member to Designed Member

Member2(DM2) to Member1 (DM1) Axis Along (Flush on top flange, DM2 smaller depth and
smaller flange thickness)
The frame connection is the same as in .Designed Member to Designed Member -
Axis Along (on page 59)

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 67

Execute Detailing Command

Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along

Member (DM2) to Member (DM1) Axis Along (M2 offset above M1)
The frame connection is the same as Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis
Along (on page 59).

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along

Member(DM2) to Member (DM1) Axis Along (Flush on top flange, M2 flange thickness > M1
flange thickness)
The frame connection is the same as Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis
Along (on page 59).

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 68

Execute Detailing Command

Designed Member to Designed Member - I Seated

Member2 (DM2) to Member1 (DM1) Axis Along (“I-Seated”)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 73

Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Center

DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM 3. Both members
were defined using cardinal point 5.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 74

Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Opposite Connect Points

DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM3. DM1 and DM2 use
cardinal point 2. DM3 uses cardinal point 8.

 This configuration is modeled with DM1 and DM2 using cardinal point 2 and DM3 using
cardinal point 8. There is not a frame connection between the crossing members before the
split. The member axes must intersect for the software to create the split. If there is a gap
between the two crossing systems, the software cannot create the logical connections.
Structural Detailing requires a connection to detail this case. The lapped property on the
structural framing connection is sufficient for this.
 The orientation of the split is determined by the plane through the intersection point of the
two member axes. This plane is normal to the split member axis.
 Structural Detailing does not create a connection between DM1 and DM2.
 If you place manual logical connections between the plate systems for DM1 and DM2, then
assembly connections and physical connections are created as children of the manual
logical connections.
See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 75

Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Opposite

Connect Points
DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM3. DM1 and DM2 use
cardinal point 2. DM3 uses cardinal point 8.

 The orientation of the split is not modified by detailing. The trim of the lower flanges for DM1
and DM2 are normal to the direction of the member.
 If manual logical connections are placed between plate systems for DM1 and DM2, then
assembly connections and physical connections are created as children of the manual
logical connections.
See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 76

Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Grid - Perpendicular

 The beam can be a built-up member.

 The beam can be a standard member.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box (on
page 429).
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Can - Vertical Column

 The column is continuous before the can is placed.

 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box (on
page 429).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 84

Execute Detailing Command

 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Can - Continuous Leg

 The leg is continuous.

 The column is doubly sloping (sloping X-Z and Y-Z plane).
 The column is continuous before the can is placed.
 The software does not support an incoming continuous leg. The leg must be bound to the
column that has the can inserted.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box (on
page 429).
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 85

Execute Detailing Command

Can - Multiple Braces

 The column is doubly sloping (sloping X-Z and Y-Z plane).

Can - Multiple Braces

 The beam is continuous before the can is placed. Only the columns (shown in red) exist on
either side.
 An oversized can is applied to the beam (shown in yellow).
 Braces are added to the can with rule based gaps (AxisGap - Single).
 The vertical braces, columns, and beams are all coplanar.
 The cone is set to have a matching ID with the can.
 Members are built-up members.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box (on
page 429).
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Can - Cone Transition

 The bottom leg and top leg are of different sizes.

 The can matches the outer diameter of the bottom leg.
 The cone matches the outer diameter of the top leg.
 The column is continuous before the can is placed.
 The beam is a built-up member
 The can is inserted first, then the leg sizes are changed.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box (on
page 429).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 89

Execute Detailing Command

 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Can - Beam and Column End Point

 The beam and the column share the same end point.
 The can has a larger outer diameter than the outer diameter of the leg.
 The beam is a built-up member.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box (on
page 429).
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 90

Execute Detailing Command

Can - Beam and Column Intersection

 The can matches the outer diameter and ID of the column.

 The beam is horizontal and split before the can is placed.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box (on
page 429).
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 58)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 91

SECTION 4

Place Plate Parts

Creates standalone detailed plate parts. These plate parts do not have parent systems and
are generally used for small plates that are of secondary structural importance, but are not
limited to just those uses.
You complete three steps when you are creating a plate system. First, use the Properties
command for defining properties and defaults for the plate part. Next, define the plane of the
plate. Then, define topological boundaries. You can define the topological boundaries by
selecting objects in a graphic view, selecting objects from the Workspace Explorer, or selecting
objects from a list of potential bounding objects.

Place Plate Parts Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to place the standalone detailed planar plate part in the model.
Plate Part Properties
Activates the Place Plate Part Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the plate part that you are about to place in the model. The initial plate system
properties default from the selected structural specification. For more information, see Place
Plate Parts Properties Dialog Box (on page 99).
Define Plane
Select the reference plane of the plate part. You can select multiple planes to place multiple
plate parts at the same time. The software uses the same boundaries for each plane and
places the plate parts. After placement, the plate parts are unrelated to each other and can
be edited as individual entities unless boundaries are defined as boundary curves. If so,
then a single curve is related to all of the plate parts.

Define Boundaries
Define the outside boundaries of the plate part. You can define the boundaries by selecting
objects in the model or by sketching boundary curves. If you select objects in the model, and
those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate part to maintain the
boundary relationship.
Define Thickness Direction
Specifies the side of the plane on which to place the thickness of the plate.
Finish
Places the plate part using the defined parameters.

Define Plane Controls

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 92

Place Plate Parts

Plane by Point and Vector

Specifies the reference plane by defining a vector perpendicular to the reference plane. A
third point defines the reference plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Specifies the reference plane using three points that you specify in the model.
/ Offset lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by mouse moves. The Lock
option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane option.
Offset
Specify the offset distance for the plate part from the selected reference plane. You can
specify the offset dynamically in graphics or by typing the distance. The Offset option is only
available when you use the Offset from a Plane option.
Select Vector
Select or define a vector normal to the needed plane. This option is only available when you
use the Plane by Point and Vector option.
Define Point
Specify the point along the vector at which to place the plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector option.
Define Point 1
Specify the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points option.
Define Point 2
Specify the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points option.
Define Point 3
Specify the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points option.

Define Boundary Controls

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 93

Place Plate Parts

Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you
select a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
Clarifies the required boundary. If the boundaries that you selected can form the object
boundary in more than one way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The
software prompts you to select multiple bounded areas to specify the boundary. For more
information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 34).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 44).
Boundary Curve
Draws the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
See Define Plane Controls below.
Sketching Plane
Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item

Allows you to select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as
reference geometry. You see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.
Add Projection Item
Allows you to select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you
want to use as reference geometry. The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and
you see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 94

Place Plate Parts

 Formula - Displays the formula used to derive the constraint value. You cannot edit
formulas, nor can you edit values derived by formulas.
 Layers - Filters which constraints display in the dialog based on the Sketch 2D layer to
which they belong. By default, all constraints on all layers display.
Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 35).

Reject
Clears all selected planes or boundaries.
Accept
Accepts all selected planes or boundaries.
Parent System
Select the parent system for the plate part that you are placing. Systems are defined using
the Systems and Specifications task.
Material
Select the material for the plate part.
Grade
Select the material grade for the plate part.
Thickness
Select the material thickness for the plate part.

What do you want to do?

 Transfer ownership of objects in the model (on page 96)
 Place a standalone planar plate part (on page 96)
 Modify a standalone planar plate part (on page 97)
 Delete a standalone planar plate part (on page 97)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 95

Place Plate Parts

Transfer ownership of objects in the model

1. Select one or more objects in the model.
2. Click Edit > Properties.
3. On the Configuration tab, click Transfer.
4. On the Transfer Ownership dialog box, specify the new location and permission group.
5. Click OK, and click Yes on the confirmation message.

 You must have physical write permission to the permission group where the objects
currently reside.
 You cannot undo the transfer of ownership.
 The other location receives the change when the database replication process for the
objects takes place.

Place a standalone planar plate part

1. Click Place Plate Part on the vertical toolbar.
2. Specify the plane for the plate part using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 29)
Define an offset plane (on page 30)
Define a plane using three points (on page 31)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 31)
3. Click Accept .
4. Define the plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 33)
Define a boundary curve (on page 34)
5. Click Accept .
6. Set the remaining plate system properties.
7. Click Finish.
If you define an ambiguous boundary, you must provide more information by
selecting bounded areas that together compose the total bounded area. For more information,
see Boundary Methods (on page 32).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 96

Place Plate Parts

Modify a standalone planar plate part

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Plate Parts in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the planar plate part to modify.
4. Using the ribbon controls, edit the planar plate part as needed.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.

Delete a standalone planar plate part

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Plate Parts in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the planar plate part to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Transfer Ownership Dialog Box

Allows you to specify a new location and permission group for the selected model objects.
Current location
Displays the name of the location that the current permission group is associated with. All of
the objects in the select set must belong to the same location.
Current permission group
Displays the name of the permission group that the selected objects are currently
associated with. If all of the objects in the select set do belong to the same permission
group, this box appears blank.
New location
Specifies the name of the location to which to assign the objects. In a global workshare
configuration, this box lists all the locations in which you have write access to one or more
permission groups. The selection in this box filters the entries in the New permission group
box.
New permission group
Specifies the new permission group to which to assign the selected objects. If you have
specified a value in the New location box, this list displays all permission groups that you
have write access to in the selected location. If you have not specified a value in the New
location box, this list includes all permission groups that you have write access to in all
locations except the current location. This box is blank if you do not have write access to
any permission groups at any locations other than the current one.
It is strongly recommended that administrators follow naming convention rules
that include the location as a prefix in the permission group name.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 97

Place Plate Parts

See Also
Relationships Tab (on page 400)

Boundary List Dialog Box

The Boundary List dialog box displays all the boundaries that you have currently selected and
all the potential boundaries that you could select. You activate this dialog box by clicking
Boundary List on the command ribbon during the boundary definition step.

Current boundary list

Lists all the selected boundaries. The object that you are placing has these boundaries.
Potential Boundaries List
Opens the Potential boundaries list.
Potential boundary list
Lists all boundaries objects that you can select that meet the following criteria:
 Boundaries removed from the Current boundary list using the Remove button.
 Objects associated with other current boundaries, such as a child plate system of a
current plate system boundary.
Add
Adds the selected boundaries in the Potential boundaries list to the Current boundary
list.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 98

Place Plate Parts

Remove
Removes the selected boundaries from the Current boundary list and returns them to the
Potential boundaries list.
Clear All
Removes all boundaries from the Current boundary list.
See Also
Use the Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 33)

Place Plate Parts Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the plate part system that you are editing.
See Also
Main Tab (Place Plate Parts Properties Dialog Box) (on page 99)
Material Tab (on page 100)

Main Tab (Place Plate Parts Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the standalone planar plate part.
Name
Specifies the name of the plate part. Names generated by a rule include a Global
Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was
created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate part. Select User Defined to type a name in
the Name box.
Type
Select the type of plate part that you are placing. If you do not specify a type, the software
automatically determines the type based on the plate part orientation. Plate parts that are
mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to Deck. Plate parts that are mostly transverse
(YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse Bulkhead. Plate parts that are mostly longitudinal
(XZ plane) are assigned to Longitudinal Bulkhead. This option is also used by the naming
rule to name the plate part.
Naming Category
Select a category for the plate part. Categories specify the role of the plate part in the
marine structure.
Parent System
Specifies the parent plate system for the plate part. You can define a different parent system
in the Systems and Specifications task. When the plate part is created, the property values
for the parent plate system are used for the initial plate part property values. When a parent
property value changes, the corresponding plate part value is not updated.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays Planar Plate, similar to the Molded Forms command used to create a planar plate
system.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 99

Place Plate Parts

Specification
Select the structural specification for the plate part.
Description
Type a description for the plate part.
Tightness
Select the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate part.

Board Management
Symmetry
Displays the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by the Board
Management Service.
Manually Override
Turn on this option to stop the Board Management Service from considering this part.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by the Board Management Service.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
See Also
Place Plate Parts Properties Dialog Box (on page 99)

Material Tab
Specifies the material properties for the plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
See Also
Place Plate Parts Properties Dialog Box (on page 99)
Plate Edge Reinforcement Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 437)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 100

SECTION 5

Lapped Plate
Places or modifies a lapped plate on a plate part or standalone plate part. The lapped part
derives its surface definition from the part or system to which it is lapped.

When you create lapped parts, you must select the systems or parts to lap to, define the
boundary for the lapped plate, and specify the side of plate. There are several methods
available for you to use when you define the boundary for the lapped part. You can graphically
pick bounding objects, select the bounding objects from a list of potential bounding objects, or
sketch a boundary curve to define the boundaries. You define the side of plate and thickness
direction graphically. You can also specify other attributes, such as name rule and material type,
for the lapped plate part.
The software creates assembly connections between bounded edges and between the faces of
lapped parts. If the plate is lapped to a system, and the lapped plate crosses a seam on the
system, two assembly connections are created; one connection to each of the root parts. If the
plate is lapped to a system, assembly connections are not created until the root parts have been
detailed using Execute Detailing .
You can create only one lapped part at a time.

Lapped Plate Physical Connections

Physical connections are created as children of the lapped plate assembly connections. When
you add, delete, or modify a sketched feature on the lapped plate, physical connections are
created and updated as needed. A lapped plate with openings has an outer contour and a
closed inner contour for each opening. A separate physical connection is created for each

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 101

Lapped Plate

contour. These physical connections are children of the parent physical connection of the lapped
plate. Different weld parameters can be specified for each physical connection.

Copying a Lapped Plate

If you copy, move, or mirror a lapped plate (including through Model Data Reuse operations in
the Project Management task), and you do not include a lapped-to part in the copy (by selecting
Edit > Paste > Delete Optional), then the software replaces the lapped-to part with a surface
body. This prevents the lapped plate from going to the To Do List. After the copy, you can
replace the surface body with a new plate system or part.
If the original lapped-to part was detailed, Delete Optional also deletes the physical connection
between the lapped plate and lapped-to plate. For the copied lapped plate, if you replace the
lapped-to surface body with a new detailed plate part, then the software creates a new physical
connection.
For more information, see Move, Mirror Copy, and Paste Dialog Box in the Common User's
Guide, and Model Data Reuse (MDR) in the Project Management User's Guide.

Lapped Plate Ribbon

Displays the controls used to place lapped plates.
Properties
Activates the Lapped Plate Part Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties of the lapped plate part that you are about to place in the model. The initial
lapped plate properties default from the parent plate system, if there is one, or from the
selected structural specification. For more information, see Lapped Plate Part Properties
Dialog Box (on page 107).
Select Lapped-To Parts

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 102

Lapped Plate

Select the plate system, or standalone plate part to which to lap the new plate. You can
select the plate part in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.

Boundaries
Define the outside boundaries of the lapped plate. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model, and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the lapped plate to
maintain the boundary relationship.
Select Side of Plate
Define the side of the lapped to plate on which to create the lapped plate. You define the
side of plate graphically by moving the pointer in the graphic view to change a direction
arrow. The lapped part thickness direction is always away from the selected side of the plate
part.
Finish
Places the plate part using the defined parameters.

Define Boundary Controls

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
After you select a boundary plate, press SHIFT to select the Pick Edges option.
Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you
select a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 103

Lapped Plate

Sketching Plane
Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item

Constraint Table
Activates the Constraint Table dialog from which you can modify sketch curve constraint
values without going back into the Sketch 2D environment. A sketch curve must have
already been defined in Sketch 2D before this option is available.
 Type - Displays the constraint type. You cannot edit the type.
 Name - Displays the constraint name. You cannot edit the name.
 Value - Defines the constraint value. Include the units of measurement when you edit
the value: deg, mm, in, and so forth. You cannot edit a value if it is derived by a formula.
 Value Type - Displays the value type: angle, radial, linear, and so forth. You cannot edit
the value type.
 Formula - Displays the formula used to derive the constraint value. You cannot edit
formulas, nor can you edit values derived by formulas.
 Layers - Filters which constraints display in the dialog based on the Sketch 2D layer to
which they belong. By default, all constraints on all layers display.
Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 35).

Define Plane Controls

Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 104

Lapped Plate

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.
/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane
plane method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 105

Lapped Plate

Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Parent System
Select the parent system for the plate part that you are placing. Systems are defined using
the Systems and Specifications task.
Material
Select the material for the plate part.
Grade
Select the grade for the plate part.
Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the lapped plate.
Reject
Clears all selected planes or boundaries.
Accept
Accepts all selected planes or boundaries.

What do you want to do?

 Create a lapped plate part (on page 106)
 Modify a lapped plate part (on page 106)
 Delete a lapped plate part (on page 107)

Create a lapped plate part

1. Click Lapped Plate .
2. Select the plate systems or parts to which to lap the new plate.

 You can select the plate parts in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
 If you select a curved surface, the lapped part can have only one lapped connection to
this system or part. If you select a planar part or system, the lapped part can have
lapped connections with multiple coplanar parts or systems.
3. Specify the boundaries for the new plate.
4. Specify the side on which to place the plate.

Modify a lapped plate part

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 106

Lapped Plate

2. Select Plate Parts in the Locate Filter box.

3. Select the lapped plate system to modify.
You can select the plate parts in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
4. Using the ribbon controls, edit the lapped plate system as needed.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.

Delete a lapped plate part

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Plate Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the lapped plate part to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Lapped Plate Part Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the lapped plate part that you are editing.
See Also
Main Tab (Lapped Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 107)
Material Tab (Lapped Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 108)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)

Main Tab (Lapped Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the smart occurrence object.

Feature Name
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the object. Select User Defined to type a name in the
Name box.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 107

Lapped Plate

Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
See Also
Lapped Plate Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 107)

Material Tab (Lapped Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the material properties for the lapped plate part that you are editing.
Material
Select the material for the plate part.
Grade
Select the material grade for the plate part.
Actual Thickness
Select the material thickness for the plate part.
See Also
Lapped Plate Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 107)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 108

SECTION 6

Place Bracket Parts

Creates bracket plate parts that reinforce other plate parts. A bracket is always bounded to
the structure that it supports. The bracket is a standard structural part and has predefined
shapes.
A bracket is classified by its number of supports. The following examples show the general
support selection sequence:

2 Support (2S) Bracket

3 Support (3S) Bracket

4 Support (4S) Bracket

5 Support (5S) Bracket

Place Bracket Parts Ribbon

Displays the controls used to place brackets.
Properties
Activates the Bracket Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the brackets that you are about to place in the model. The initial bracket

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 109

Place Bracket Parts

properties default from the selected structural specification. For more information, see
Bracket Properties Dialog Box (on page 116).
Select Plane
Select the plane upon which you want to place the bracket.
Select Bracket Supports
Define the structural support parts for the bracket. You must create detail parts for the
supports before you can specify them as bracket supports. For more information, see
Execute Detailing Command (on page 54). Brackets require at least two, but not more than
five, structural support parts.
Select Thickness Direction
Move the pointer to change the thickness direction for the bracket.
Finish
Places the bracket using the defined parameters.

Define Plane Controls

By Plane or Offset Plane
Places the plate system a specified distance from the reference plane. If you choose this
option, you must define the offset distance. An offset distance of zero defines a coincident
plane.
Plane by Point and Vector
Specifies the reference plane by defining a vector perpendicular to the reference plane. A
third point defines the reference plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 110

Place Bracket Parts

Define Point
Specify the point along the vector at which to place the plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector option.
Define Point 1
Specify the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points option.
Define Point 2
Specify the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points option.
Define Point 3
Specify the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points option.

Support 1
Select the first support for the bracket.

Support 2
Select the second support for the bracket.

Support 3
Select the third support for the bracket.

Support 4
Select the fourth support for the bracket.

Support 5
Select the fifth support for the bracket.
Shape
Select the shape of the bracket.
Cancel
Clears all selected planes or boundaries.
Accept
Accepts all selected planes or boundaries.
Parent System
Select the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. Systems are defined
using the Systems and Specifications task.
Name
Displays the name of the plate system that you are placing.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 111

Place Bracket Parts

What do you want to do?

 Create a two support bracket (on page 112)
 Create a three support bracket (on page 113)
 Create a four support bracket (on page 114)
 Create a five support bracket (on page 115)
 Modify a bracket (on page 116)
 Delete a bracket (on page 116)

Place Bracket Parts

Create a five support bracket

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 118

Place Bracket Parts

answer that is cumulatively defined by the preceding rows. The Answer/Result box is not
editable if Rule Based is selected.
Rule Based
Defines when a question is rule-driven. This option is selected by default for each question.
 Select to always use the default rule-based answer or result. For an existing object, if a
change in the model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the answer is changed to
the new default.
 Clear to manually select an answer or result. For an existing object, if a change in the
model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the manually-selected answer is not
changed to the new default. If the manually selected answer is not in the list of valid
answers, then the new default is used.
If multiple existing objects are selected and a row contains a mix of rule-
based and non-rule-based answers/results, then the Answer/Result box is blank, and
the Rule Based check is unavailable, as shown in the following example.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Questions, Answers, and Results

The default answers are determined by the rule class.
Results - Select the bracket class.
The questions described here represent the default rules delivered with the
software. User-customized rules may have different questions.
See Also
Bracket Properties Dialog Box (on page 116)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 119

SECTION 7

Placing Standalone Stiffener Profile

Parts
The Standalone Stiffener Profile Parts commands define a single profile part or multiple
profile parts.
The only method available to create a standalone stiffener part is by intersection.
When you create a landing curve, it could be linear, curved, polyline, circle, circular arc, or
elliptical in shape.
You can use various input methods to create profile parts. You choose a method based on the
type of trace curve that you need to create.
You can use any of the following methods to easily create profile parts for vertical, horizontal,
slope, and curve:
 Typing the location line and the inclination angle from an orthogonal surface
 Specifying a distance from a reference surface or grid system
 Referring an existing surface and defining a nonorthogonal surface tangent to the existing
surface (for example, the surface of a stiffener connected to a longitudinal frame).

Place Stiffener Profile Parts by Intersection - Creates a standalone stiffener

profile on the selected detailed plate part by defining the landing curve as the
intersection of the selected plate part and a grid plane. For more information, see
Place Stiffener Profile Part by Intersection (on page 120).

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - Places a standalone profile part along the
free edge of a plate part. For more information, see Profile Edge Reinforcement
Part (on page 168).

Place Stiffener Profile Part by Intersection

Creates a standalone stiffener profile part on the selected detailed plate part by defining the
landing curve of the stiffener as the intersection of the selected plate part and a grid plane.
You can control the boundaries of the stiffener profile by selecting a plate system or part, profile
system or part, or grid plane that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries,
the software uses the landing curve ends as the stiffener profile boundaries.
After defining the landing curve and the boundaries, you can set the profile orientation. If the
profile part is placed on a plate system, the plate system side and the flange direction for
unsymmetrical profile sections are set by the molded convention of the plate system. However,
you can override the default settings with the Position Definition control on the ribbon. If the

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 120

Placing Standalone Stiffener Profile Parts

profile part is placed on a standalone plate part, the plate side and flange direction are toggled
directly with the Position Definition control on the ribbon.

Stiffener Profile Part by Intersection Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to place a standalone stiffener profile part in the model.
Profile by Intersection Properties
Activates the Profile Part Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the profile part that you are about to place in the model. If the profile part is
placed on a plate system, the initial settings default from the parent plate system. For more
information, see Profile Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 124).
Plate System or Part
Select the plate system or part to stiffen. You can select multiple plate systems to place
multiple stiffener profiles systems at the same time. The software uses the same information
for each stiffener profile system. After placement, the stiffener profiles are unrelated to each
other and can be edited as individual entities.
Section Type
Select the cross section type for the profile.
Section Size
Select the cross section size for the profile.
Name
Displays the name of the stiffener profile that you are placing.
Landing Curve Definition
Select the grid planes that intersect the plate system or part at which to place the stiffener
profiles.
Position Definition
Select the plate side, mounting face, load point, and flange direction. See the Position
Definition controls described below.

Position Definition
Flip Side
Defines the side of the plate system or profile part on which the profile part is placed.
Clicking the control toggles the profile between the two sides.
Flip Direction
Defines the flange direction for an unsymmetrical profile cross section. Clicking the control
toggles the flange between the two sides.
Mounting Face
Defines the mounting face of the profile part.
Load Point
Defines the load point of the profile part. Only the load points for the defined mounting face
are displayed.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 121

Placing Standalone Stiffener Profile Parts

Boundary Definition
Define the boundaries of the stiffener profile. You can define the boundaries by selecting
objects in the model. If you select objects in the model, and those objects are moved, the
software automatically resizes the stiffener profile to maintain the boundary relationship.

Boundary Definition Controls

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Solve Ambiguity
If the objects that you selected in the model for the boundary define an ambiguous solution,
then the software prompts you to select one bounded section to clarify the needed
boundary. This ambiguity only occurs if one of the boundaries, such as the hull, wraps
around both sides of object. Move the cursor over a bounded section, and then click to
select.

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 98).
Boundary 1
Select the first boundary.
Boundary 2
Select the second boundary.
Finish
Places the plate system using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.

What do you want to do?

 Place a stiffener profile part by intersection (on page 123)
 Modify a stiffener profile part (on page 123)
 Delete a stiffener profile part (on page 124)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 122

Placing Standalone Stiffener Profile Parts

Place a stiffener profile part by intersection

1. Click Stiffener Profile Part by Intersection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system to stiffen.
3. Click Accept .
4. Select a grid plane that intersects the plate system that you selected.
5. Click Accept .
6. Define the side and flange direction of the stiffener profile with regard to the plate system.
7. Click Accept .
8. Define the orientation of the stiffener profile with regard to the plate system.
9. Click Accept .
10. Define the boundaries for the stiffener profile.
11. Click Accept .
12. Click Finish.
You can select more than one grid plane to place multiple stiffener profiles at one
time.

Modify a stiffener profile part

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Stiffener Parts in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the stiffener profile to modify.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Modify the stiffener profile as needed.
6. Click OK.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 123

Placing Standalone Stiffener Profile Parts

Delete a stiffener profile part

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Stiffener Parts in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the stiffener profile to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Modify a beam profile part

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Beam Parts in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the linear beam profile to modify.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Modify the profile as needed.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.

Delete a beam profile part

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Beam Parts in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the beam profile part to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Profile Part Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the settings for the profile part.
See Also
Main Tab (Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 125)
Cross Section Tab (Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 125)
Section Orientation Tab (Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 126)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 124

Placing Standalone Stiffener Profile Parts

Main Tab (Profile Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general settings for the profile.
Name
Displays the name that is assigned to the profile. Names generated by a rule include a
Global Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database
was created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare
Guide.
Rule
Specifies how the name is created. If set to a naming rule, the software automatically
generates the name for you. If you select User Defined, you can type in the profile name
yourself in the Name box.
Type
Select the type of profile. The profile type is used by the naming rule in naming the profile
part.
Naming Category
Select a naming category. The category is used by the naming rule in naming the profile
part that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system of the profile.
Landing Curve Definition Method
Displays the method by which the landing curve is defined.
Specification
Displays the specification for the profile that was inherited from the parent system.
Description
Type a description for the profile.
See Also
Profile Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 124)

Cross Section Tab (Profile Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the cross section settings for the profile.
Material
Select the material from which the profile part is constructed.
Grade
Select the grade of the profile part material.
Section Type
Select the profile section type. The software displays the section type properties for the
section type that you selected. Each section type has different properties.
Section Size

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 125

Placing Standalone Stiffener Profile Parts

Select the profile section size.

See Also
Profile Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 124)

Section Orientation Tab (Profile Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the position of the profile cross-section.
Mounting Face
Select the cross-section face to mount to the plate system.
Load Point
Select the cross-section load point through which the landing curve passes.
Landing Curve Projection Method
Select the projection method for the profile part.

1 - Landing Curve
2 - Molded Surface

Along Web Method (default)

1 - Landing Curve
2 - Molded Surface

Normal Method

Attachment Method
Select the method for attaching the profile part.
 Start Connection Method
 End Connection Method
See Also
Profile Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 124)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 126

SECTION 8

Place Corner Feature

Places a planar curve from the catalog at a selected corner. The software places the curve
coplanar to the face of a part. The feature is applied to the part as a cutout. You can place
corner features on plates, profiles, or members.

You can use the Place Corner Feature command to place corner features for drain
or vent holes on clips generated as part of the Execute Detailing command.

Place Corner Feature Ribbon

Displays the controls used to place corner features.
Properties
Activates the Corner Feature Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the corner feature that you are about to place in the model. The most important
properties for features are the rule selection criteria and the feature parameters. The initial
corner feature properties default from the corner feature rules for the selected part type. For
more information, see Corner Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 129).

Corner Point
Select a plate, profile, or member part near the corner to place the corner feature.
Shape
Select the shape for the corner feature from the list. The list of available shapes is
determined by the type of part selected and the rules you have defined.
During initial creation of the feature, click Accept to show selections in the Shape
list.
Rule Based
Enables or disables the Shape list. Selecting this check box disables the Shape list.
Finish
Places the corner feature using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Clears the selected plate, profile, or member part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 127

Place Corner Feature

Accept
Accepts the selected plate, profile, or member part.

What do you want to do?

 Place a corner feature (on page 128)
 Modify a corner feature (on page 128)
 Delete a corner feature (on page 129)

Place a corner feature

1. Click Place Corner Feature .

2. On the Place Corner Feature ribbon, click Corner Point .

3. Select near a corner on the plate, profile, or member part to which to add the corner feature.
4. Click Accept .
The Rule Based check box must be clear to select the corner feature shape.
5. Select the corner feature from the Shape list.
6. Click Finish.
7. If necessary, click Properties to define properties and defaults for the corner feature.

Modify a corner feature

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the corner feature to modify.
You can select the corner feature in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
4. Using the ribbon controls, edit the corner feature as needed.

 If you select multiple corner features of the same type, the Item box displays on the
ribbon.
 If the shape is the same for each item, that value displays in the box and a list of other
available shapes displays in the list. If you select a different shape, that shape is then
applied to all of the items.
 If the shapes are not the same for all the selected items, then the box is blank and the
list displays the available shapes. If you select a shape, that shape is then applied to all
of the selected items. If you do not select a shape, the software creates the items
according to the rule default values.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 128

Place Corner Feature

 If there are no common shapes, the Item box is disabled and the software creates the
items according to the rule default values.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.

Delete a corner feature

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the corner feature to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Corner Feature Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the corner feature that you are editing.
See Also
Main Tab (Corner Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 129)
Selection Tab (Corner Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 130)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)

Main Tab (Corner Feature Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the corner feature part system.

Feature Name
Name
Specifies the name of the corner feature. Names generated by a rule include a Global
Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was
created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use. Select User Defined to specify the name yourself in the
Name box.
See Also
Corner Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 129)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 129

Place Corner Feature

Selection Tab (Corner Feature Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for corner feature selection.

 The software reevaluates the selection rules after any change occurs to the values, when
you select a new object, or when you open a different property page.
 You can resize the columns by sliding the divider in the heading row.
Class
Displays the name of the rule class.
Question
Displays questions asked by the rule.
Answer/Result
Defines the results of the rules and the answers to questions asked by the rules. The default
results and answers are determined by the rule class. Each row represents a result or
answer that is cumulatively defined by the preceding rows. The Answer/Result box is not
editable if Rule Based is selected.
Rule Based
Defines when a question is rule-driven. This option is selected by default for each question.
 Select to always use the default rule-based answer or result. For an existing object, if a
change in the model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the answer is changed to
the new default.
 Clear to manually select an answer or result. For an existing object, if a change in the
model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the manually-selected answer is not
changed to the new default. If the manually selected answer is not in the list of valid
answers, then the new default is used.
If multiple existing objects are selected and a row contains a mix of rule-
based and non-rule-based answers/results, then the Answer/Result box is blank, and
the Rule Based check is unavailable, as shown in the following example.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Questions, Answers, and Results

The default answers are determined by the rule class.
Corner Placement
Select the corner placement method.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 130

Place Corner Feature

Arrest Stress Cracking

Select Yes if the corner feature is to provide relief from stress cracking at the corner.
Drainage on Part
Select Yes if the corner feature is to provide drainage.
Corner Feature Orientation
Select NoFlip if the corner is to use its default orientation along the local u and v axes of the
corner. This only has an effect on non-symmetrical corner features.
Apply Treatment
Select Yes to apply an edge treatment to the feature.
Enforce Seam Adjustment
Select Yes to place a default corner feature that modifies if you move a nearby seam. Select
No to place a different corner feature that does not modify if you move a nearby seam. The
default corner feature is long scallop with seam, and the default answer is Yes.
Results
Select the corner feature class. Only valid selections based on user answers display.
Results
Select the corner feature. Only valid selections based on the user answers and selected
corner feature class display.
The questions described here represent the default rules delivered with the
software. User-customized rules may have different questions.
See Also
Corner Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 129)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 131

SECTION 9

Place Multiple Corner Features

Places planar curves from the catalog at the corners of a selected part. The software places
the curves coplanar to the face of a part. The features are applied to the part as a cutout.
You can place corner features on plate systems, plate parts, assemblies, and blocks.

Place Multiple Corner Features Ribbon

Displays the controls used to place multiple corner features.
Place Multiple Corner Features
Select a plate part on which to place the corner features. You can place the corner features
on multiple parts by selecting plate systems, plate parts, assemblies, or blocks.
Finish
Places the corner feature using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Clears the selected plate or profile part.
Accept
Accepts the selected plate or profile part.
Shape
Select the shape for the corner feature from the list. The list of available shapes is
determined by the type of part that you have selected and the rules that you have defined.

 During initial creation of the feature, click Accept to show selections in the Shape list.
 If the shape is the same for each corner feature, that value displays in the box and a list
of other available shapes displays in the list. If you select a different shape, that shape
is then applied to all of the selected corner features.
 If the shapes are not the same for all the selected corner features, then the box is blank
and the list displays the available shapes. If you select a shape, that shape is then
applied to all of the selected corner features. If you do not select a shape, the software
creates the corner features according to the rule default values.
 If there are no common shapes, the Shape box is disabled and the software creates the
corner features according to the rule default values.
Rule Based
Enables or disables the Shape list. Selecting this check box disables the Shape list.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 132

Place Multiple Corner Features

Place multiple corner features

1. Click Place Multiple Corner Feature .
2. Select the plate systems, plate parts, assemblies, or blocks to which to add the corner
features.
3. Click Accept .
The Rule Based check box must be cleared to select the corner features shapes.
4. If the shape needs to be different than the shape selected by the rule, select the value from
the Shape list.
5. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 133

SECTION 10

Place Edge Feature

Places a planar curve from the catalog along a selected edge, at a selected point on the
edge, and coplanar to the face of a part. The feature is applied to the part as a cutout.

You can use the Place Edge Feature command to place edge features for drain or
vent holes on clips generated as part of the Execute Detailing command.

Place Edge Feature Ribbon

Displays the controls used to place edge features.
Properties
Activates the Edge Feature Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the edge feature that you are about to place in the model. The most important
properties for features are the rule selection criteria and the feature parameters. The initial
edge feature properties default from the edge feature rules for the selected part type. For
more information, see Edge Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 138).

Select Edge
Select the edge of the plate or profile part to place the edge feature.

Select Position Point

Select the position on the edge of the plate or profile part to place the edge feature
Finish
Places the edge feature using the defined parameters.
Type
Select the type of edge feature to place. Available options include edge feature and
waterstop.
Shape
Select the shape for the edge feature from the list. The list of available shapes is determined
by the type of part that you have selected and the rules that you have defined.
Rule Based
Enables or disables the Shape list. Selecting this check box disables the Shape list.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 134

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 137

Place Edge Feature

Modify an edge feature

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Features in the Locate Filter box.
The Rule Based check box must be clear to select the edge feature.
3. Select the edge feature to modify.
You can select the edge feature in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
4. Using the ribbon controls, edit the edge feature as needed.

 If you select multiple edge features of the same type, the Item box displays on the
ribbon.
 If the shape is the same for each item, that value displays in the box and a list of other
available shapes displays in the list. If you select a different shape, that shape is then
applied to all of the items.
 If the shapes are not the same for all the selected items, then the box is blank and the
list displays the allowed available shapes. If you select a shape, that shape is then
applied to all of the selected items. If you do not select a shape, the software creates
the items according to the rule default values.
 If there are no common shapes, the Item box is disabled and the software creates the
items according to the rule default values.

Delete an edge feature

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the edge feature to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Edge Feature Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the edge feature that you are editing.
See Also
Main Tab (Edge Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 138)
Selection Tab (Edge Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 139)
Parameter Tab (on page 141)
Members Tab (on page 161)
Controlled Interfaces Tab (Edge Treatment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 161)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)
General Tab (on page 402)

Main Tab (Edge Feature Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the edge feature.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 138

Place Edge Feature

Feature Name
Name
Specifies the name of the edge feature. Names generated by a rule include a Global
Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was
created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use. Select User Defined to specify the name yourself in the
Name box.

Board Management
Symmetry
Displays the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by the Board
Management Service.
Manually Override
Select this option to stop the Board Management Service from considering this part.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by the Board Management Service.
See Also
Edge Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 138)
Board Management Service (on page 377)

Selection Tab (Edge Feature Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for edge feature selection.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 139

Place Edge Feature

 Select to always use the default rule-based answer or result. For an existing object, if a
change in the model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the answer is changed to
the new default.
 Clear to manually select an answer or result. For an existing object, if a change in the
model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the manually-selected answer is not
changed to the new default. If the manually selected answer is not in the list of valid
answers, then the new default is used.
If multiple existing objects are selected and a row contains a mix of rule-
based and non-rule-based answers/results, then the Answer/Result box is blank, and
the Rule Based check is unavailable, as shown in the following example.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Questions, Answers, and Results

The default answers are determined by the rule class.
Edge Placement
Select the edge placement method.
Off of Edge
Select Yes if the edge feature is to be offset from the edge. Select No if the edge feature
goes to the edge.
Drainage on Part
Select Yes if the edge feature is to provide drainage.
Apply Treatment
Select Yes to apply an edge treatment to the feature.
Results
Select the edge feature class. Only valid selections based on the user answers display in
the list.
Results
Select the edge feature. Only valid selections based on the user answers and the selected
edge feature class display in the list.
The questions described here represent the default rules delivered with the
software. User-customized rules may have different questions.
See Also
Edge Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 138)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 140

Place Edge Feature

Parameter Tab
Specifies the parameters for the feature.
Parameter
Displays the name of the parameter.
Value
Displays the value of the parameter. Values that are grayed cannot be modified.
Rule-Based
Displays a checkbox if the parameter value is rule-based. Clear the check box to modify the
value in the Value box.
Catalog Value
Displays the original catalog value if the Value box has been modified.
LongPointEdge
Optional parameter indicating whether the software places the edge feature based on the
long point or the short point.
The options described here represent the default rules delivered with the
software. User-customized rules may have different options.
See Also
Corner Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 129)
Edge Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 138)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 141

SECTION 11

Place Edge Features at Seams

Places a planar curve from the catalog where the edge of the part meets a seam. The
feature is applied to the part as a cutout.

Place Edge Feature at Seams Ribbon

Displays the controls used to place edge features at seams.

Select Plate or Profile

Select the plate or profile to add the edge features.
Finish
Places edge features on the select objects at all intersecting seams.
Cancel
Clears the selected edge.
Accept
Accepts the selected edge.
Shape
Select the shape for the edge feature from the list. The list of available shapes is determined
by the type of part that you have selected and the rules that you have defined.
Rule Based
Enables or disables the Shape list. Selecting this check box disables the Shape list.

 During initial creation of the feature, click Accept to show selections in the Shape list.
 If the shape is the same for each edge feature, that value displays in the box and a list
of other available shapes displays in the list. If you select a different shape, that shape
is then applied to all of the selected edge features.
 If the shapes are not the same for all the selected edge features, then the box is blank
and the list displays the available shapes. If you select a shape, that shape is then
applied to all of the selected edge features. If you do not select a shape, the software
creates the edge features according to the rule default values.
 If there are no common shapes, the Shape box is disabled and the software creates the
edge features according to the rule default values.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 142

Place Edge Features at Seams

Place an edge feature at seams

1. Click Place Edge Feature at Seams .
2. Select the plate or profile part to which to add the edge features.
3. Click Accept .
4. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 143

SECTION 12

Place Edge Features by Offset

Places a series of planar curves from the catalog along a selected edge coplanar to the face
of a part. You specify the number of edge features and the distance between them. The features
are applied to the part as a cutout.

Place Edge Features by Offset Ribbon

Displays the controls used to place edge features by offset.

Select Edges
Select the edge of the plate or profile part at the location for the edge feature.
Select Reference
Select the position from which to start calculating the edge features. This point can be an
object in the design or a point.
Define Offsets
Specify the distance between the edge features.
Unlimited
Specifies the same distance between all edge features. For more information, see Offset
Unlimited Case Dialog Box (on page 146).

Table
Specifies unique distances between the features.
Shape
Select the shape for the edge feature from the list. The list of available shapes is determined
by the type of part that you have selected and the rules that you have defined.
Rule Based
Enables or disables the Shape list. Selecting this check box disables the Shape list.

 During initial creation of the feature, click OK on the Unlimited or Table dialog boxes to
show selections in the Shape list. To change the feature shape you must clear the Rule
Based check box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 144

Place Edge Features by Offset

 If the shape is the same for each edge feature, that value displays in the box and a list
of other available shapes displays in the list. If you select a different shape, that shape
is then applied to all of the selected edge features.
 If the shapes are not the same for all the selected edge features, then the box is blank
and the list displays the available shapes. If you select a shape, that shape is then
applied to all of the selected edge features. If you do not select a shape, the software
creates the edge features according to the rule default values.
 If there are no common shapes, the Shape box is disabled and the software creates the
edge features according to the rule default values.
Finish
Places the edge features using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Clears the current selection.
Accept
Accepts the current selection.

What do you want to do?

 Place equally spaced edge features (on page 145)
 Place multiple edge features by table (on page 146)

Place equally spaced edge features

1. Click Place Edge Features by Offset .

2. On the Place Edge Feature by offset ribbon, click Select Edge .

3. Select the edge of the plate or profile part to which to add the edge features.
4. Click Select Reference .
5. Click Unlimited Case .
6. Specify the number of edge features to place using the +ve or -ve Count boxes.
7. Specify the distance between the edge features using the +ve or -ve Count boxes.
8. Select the distance calculation method from the Definition list.
9. Specify whether or not to use the reference start point as the location for the first edge
feature.
10. Click OK.
The Rule Based check box must be clear to select the edge feature shape.
11. Select the edge feature shape from the Shape list.
12. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 145

Place Edge Features by Offset

Place multiple edge features by table

1. Click Place Edge Features by Offset .

2. On the Place Edge Feature by offset ribbon, click Select Edge .

3. Select the edge of the plate or profile part to which to add the edge features.
4. Click Select Reference .
5. Click Accept .

6. Click By Table .
7. Specify the number of features to place and the distance between each edge feature.
8. Click OK.
The Rule Based check box must be clear to select the edge feature shape.
9. Select the edge feature from the Shape list.
10. Click Finish.

Offset Unlimited Case Dialog Box

Displays the controls used to place unlimited edge features.
+ve Offset
Displays offset distance in the positive direction from the reference point. The software
displays an arrow along the selected edge to indicate the positive direction.
+ve Count
Displays the number of edge features to place in the positive direction.
-ve Offset
Displays offset distance in the negative direction from the reference point.
-ve Count
Displays the number of edge features to place in the negative direction.
Definition
Specifies how the distances are calculated.
Place Feature At Reference Point
Places an edge feature at the reference start point.
See Also
Place Edge Features by Offset (on page 144)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 146

Place Edge Features by Offset

Offset Table for Edge Feature Dialog Box

Displays the controls used to place edge features by table.
Sequence
Displays the number of the order in which the reference points were chosen.
CoordSys
Displays the name of the coordinate system.
Reference
Displays the name of the reference point.
Offset
Displays the distance from the offset point.
Count
Displays the number of edge features to place.
Relative
Indicates that the offset distance is from the previous edge feature rather than the reference
start point.
Insert Row Above
Adds a row to the table above the highlighted row.
Insert Row Below
Adds a row to the table below the highlighted row.
Delete Row
Removes the highlighted row.
Place Feature At Reference Point
Places an edge feature at the reference start point.
Definition
Specifies how the distances are calculated.
See Also
Place Edge Features by Offset (on page 144)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 147

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 151

Place Sketched Features

 Place a sketched feature from the catalog (on page 153)

 Modify a sketched feature (on page 154)
 Delete a sketched feature (on page 154)

Place a sketched feature by sketching

1. Click Place Sketched Feature on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate, profile, or member part in which to place the sketched feature.
3. Specify the sketching plane for the opening using one of the following methods:
Define an offset plane (on page 30)
Define a plane using three points (on page 31)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 31)

 If you selected a planar plate part, its surface is automatically specified as the coincident
sketch plane. You can specify another sketch plane by one of the other methods if
needed.
 If you selected a profile or member part, one of the surface ports on the web or flange
can be specified as the sketch plane.

4. Click Add Intersecting Item .

5. Select objects in the Model to use as reference geometry that intersect the sketching plane.
These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.
6. Click Add Projection Item .
7. Select objects in the Model to use as reference geometry that do not intersect the sketching
plane. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear in the Sketch
2D environment.
8. Click Sketch 2D .
9. Using the available drawing commands in the Sketch 2D environment, draw the sketched
feature.
You must sketch a closed contour.
10. Click Finish on the ribbon in the Sketch 2D environment.
11. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the sketched feature.
12. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 152

Place Sketched Features

Place a sketched feature from the catalog

1. Click Place Sketched Feature on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate, profile, or member part in which to place the sketched feature.
3. Click Properties .
4. Specify the sketching plane for the opening using one of the following methods:
Define an offset plane (on page 30)
Define a plane using three points (on page 31)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 31)

5. Click Add Intersecting Item .

6. Select objects in the Model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects will appear in the Draft 2D environment.
7. Click Add Projection Item .
8. Select objects in the Model to use as reference geometry that do not intersect the sketching
plane. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear in the Draft
2D environment.
9. Open the Sketched Feature Properties.
10. Click Sketch 2D .
The Sketched Feature Properties dialog box must be open when you
click Sketch 2D. It cannot be accessed after the Draft 2D environment is open.
11. Select the Catalog tab on the Sketched Feature Properties dialog box.
12. Select the opening to place from the opening shapes in the catalog.
13. Drag the preview of the selected opening shape into the Draft 2D environment.
14. Click OK on the Sketched Feature Properties dialog box.
15. Click Finish on the ribbon in the Draft 2D environment.
16. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 153

Place Sketched Features

Modify a sketched feature

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Features in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the sketched feature to modify.
You can select the sketched feature in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer.
4. Using the ribbon controls, edit the sketched feature as needed.

 When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects have in
common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected, that
value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.
 If you select multiple sketched features from the same sketch file, you can edit the geometry
for those features as well as the properties. If the sketched features are from multiple sketch
files, then you can only edit the properties of those features.

Delete a sketched feature

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the sketched feature to delete.
3. Click Delete .

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 154

SECTION 14

Place Edge Treatment

Specifies the characteristics of free edges. Free edges often need to be shaped with a
grinder, or beveled to satisfy paint adhesion, stress concentration, or weld joint requirements.
A free edge is an edge that is not completely covered either by a connection or by another free
edge treatment. That means that a free edge can be an opening edge (created in the Molded
Forms task), a hole edge (created in the Hole Management task), an edge made by use of a
boundary curve, the edge of a lapped plate, or an edge defined by use of a reference plane. A
free edge treatment is any operation performed on a free edge, such as grind, bevel, or mill.

Place Edge Treatment Ribbon

Displays the controls used to place an edge treatment.
Properties
Activates the Edge Treatment Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the free edge treatment that you are about to place in the model. The most
important properties for edge treatments are the rule selection criteria and the treatment
parameters. The initial edge treatment properties default from the edge treatment rules for
the selected part type (plate, profile, or member). For more information, see Edge Treatment
Properties Dialog Box (on page 157).
Pick Free Edge
Select the free edge on which to place the edge treatment.
Define Boundary 1
Select the position on the free edge to start the free edge treatment.
Define Boundary 2
Select the position on the free edge to stop the free edge treatment.
Finish
Places the edge treatment using the defined parameters.
Accept
Accepts the selected edge treatment.
Bound By
Specifies whether the free edge treatment is bound by an object or a point.
Type
Specifies the type of free edge treatment to apply.
Rule Based
Enables or disables the Type list. Selecting this check box disables the Type list.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 155

Place Edge Treatment

What do you want to do?

 Place a free edge treatment (on page 156)
 Modify a free edge treatment (on page 156)
 Copy a free edge treatment (on page 157)
 Delete a free edge treatment (on page 157)

Place a free edge treatment

1. Click Place Edge Treatment .
2. Select the free edge to which to add the free edge treatment.
3. Click Accept to execute the free edge treatment rules.
The Rule Based check box must be clear to select the edge treatment type.
4. Select the type of free edge treatment to apply from the Type list.
5. To place the free edge treatment along the entire length of the selected free edge, click
Finish.
6. To specify a start point for the free edge treatment, click Define Boundary 1 .
7. Select the boundary method from the Bound By list.
8. Select the point or object to use for the start point of the free edge treatment.
9. To specify an end point for the free edge treatment, click Define Boundary 2 .
10. Select the boundary method from the Bound By list.
11. Select the point or object to use for the end point of the free edge treatment.
12. Click Finish.
13. If necessary, click Properties to define properties and defaults for the free edge treatment.

Modify a free edge treatment

The Rule Based check box must be clear to select the edge treatment type.
1. Select the free edge treatment to modify.
2. Click Properties to define properties and defaults for the free edge treatment.

 If you select multiple free edge treatments of the same type, the Item box displays on the
ribbon.
 If the type is the same for each item, that value displays in the box and a list of other
available types displays in the list. If you select a different type, that type is then applied to
all of the items.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 156

Place Edge Treatment

 If the types are not the same for all the selected items, the box is blank and the list displays
the available types. If you select a type, that type is then applied to all of the selected items.
If you do not select a type, the software creates the items according to the rule default
values.
 If there are no common types, the Item box is disabled and the software creates the items
according to the rule default values.

Copy a free edge treatment

1. Select the free edge treatment to copy.
2. Click Edit > Copy.
3. Select a reference point.
4. Select the free edge to apply the copied free edge treatment.
5. Click Edit > Paste.
6. If necessary, click Properties to define properties and defaults for the free edge
treatment.

Delete a free edge treatment

1. Select the free edge treatment to delete.
2. Click Delete .

Edge Treatment Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the free edge treatment that you are editing.
See Also
Main Tab (Edge Treatment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 157)
Selection Tab (Edge Treatment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 158)
Bevel Parameters Tab (on page 159)
Members Tab (on page 161)
Controlled Interfaces Tab (Edge Treatment Properties Dialog Box) (on page 161)

Main Tab (Edge Treatment Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the edge feature.

Feature Name
Name
Specifies the name of the edge treatment. Names generated by a rule include a Global
Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was
created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 157

Place Edge Treatment

Rule
Select the naming rule to use. Select User Defined to specify the name yourself in the
Name box.
Type
Specifies the type of free edge treatment.
Length
Specifies the length of the free edge treatment.
See Also
Edge Treatment Properties Dialog Box (on page 157)

Selection Tab (Edge Treatment Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for free edge treatment selection.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 158

Place Edge Treatment

If multiple existing objects are selected and a row contains a mix of rule-
based and non-rule-based answers/results, then the Answer/Result box is blank, and
the Rule Based check is unavailable, as shown in the following example.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Questions, Answers, and Results

The default questions, answers, and results are determined by the rule class.
Edge Treatment
Select the edge treatment type.
Results
Select the edge treatment type. Only valid selections based on the user answers and the
selected edge treatment class display in the list.
Grind Shape
Select the shape to apply.
Category
Select the category to apply.
Grind Side
Select the grind side to apply.
Results
Select the edge treatment. Only valid selections based on the user answers and selected
grind method display in the list.
The questions described here represent the default rules delivered with the
software. User-customized rules may have different questions.
See Also
Edge Treatment Properties Dialog Box (on page 157)

Bevel Parameters Tab

Specifies the bevel parameters used for the smart occurrence object, such as a physical
connection or free edge treatment.
Reference Part
Specifies the part containing the bevel.
Depth
Specifies the depth of the bevels. The Depth boxes correspond to the dimensions on the
preview picture.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 159

Place Edge Treatment

Angle
Specifies the angle of the bevels. The Angle boxes correspond to the dimensions on the
preview picture.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 160

Place Edge Treatment

Members Tab
This tab is not applicable to free edge treatments.

Controlled Interfaces Tab (Edge Treatment Properties Dialog

Box)
This tab is not applicable to free edge treatments.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 161

SECTION 15

Plate Edge Reinforcement Part

Places a standalone lapped plate part around a closed free edge (such as an opening or
sketched feature) of another plate part.

You complete three steps when you are creating a plate edge reinforcement. First, use the
Properties command to define properties and defaults for the plate edge reinforcement.
Next, define the edge to be reinforced. Then, define the shape of the plate by defining inner and
outer offsets and the side of the reinforced plate on which to place the edge reinforcement.
Plate edge reinforcements can be solid (single offset) or ringed (double offset).

Plate Edge Reinforcement Part Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to place the plate edge reinforcement in the model.
Plate Edge Reinforcement Properties
Activates the Plate Edge Reinforcement Part Properties dialog box, which you use to
view and modify the properties of the plate part that you are about to place in the model.
The initial properties default from the selected structural specification. For more information,
see Plate Edge Reinforcement Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 437).
Pick Edge
Select the closed free edge to be reinforced. You can select only one edge.
Shape Definition
Define the inner and outer contour offsets of the plate edge reinforcement.
Side of Plate
Define the side of the reinforced plate on which to place the plate edge reinforcement.
Finish
Places the reinforcement using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Clears all selected planes or boundaries.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 162

Plate Edge Reinforcement Part

Accept
Accepts all selected planes or boundaries.
Thickness Direction
Select the direction in which to apply the thickness. The software displays an arrow
indicating the active direction.
Material
Select the material for the plate part.
Grade
Select the material grade for the plate part.
Thickness
Select the material thickness for the plate part.

Shape Definition Controls

Inner Offset
Specify the offset distance for the inner contour of the plate reinforcement from the selected
edge.

 Pick a value of Blank for a solid reinforcement covering the opening or sketched
feature.
 Type a value of 0 for a reinforcement flush with the edge.
 Type a negative value for a reinforcement overlapping the edge.
Outer Offset
Specify the offset distance for the outer contour of the plate reinforcement from the selected
edge. The outer offset must be a positive value.

What do you want to do?

 Place a plate edge reinforcement part (on page 164)
 Modify a plate edge reinforcement part (on page 164)
 Delete a plate edge reinforcement part (on page 164)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 163

Plate Edge Reinforcement Part

Place a plate edge reinforcement part

1. Click Plate Edge Reinforcement Part on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the free edge to reinforce.
3. Specify the offsets to use.
 1 is the outer offset.
 2 is the inner offset.

4. Specify the side of the plate on which the plate edge reinforcement is placed.
5. Click Finish.

Modify a plate edge reinforcement part

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Plate Parts in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the plate edge reinforcement part to modify.
4. Use the commands on the ribbon to make the necessary changes.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.

Delete a plate edge reinforcement part

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Plate Parts in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the plate edge reinforcement part to delete.
4. Click Edit > Delete.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 164

Plate Edge Reinforcement Part

Plate Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the settings for the profile edge reinforcement.
See Also
Main Tab (Plate Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 165)
Material Tab (Plate Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 166)
General Tab (Plate Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 166)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)
Routing Tab (on page 166)

Main Tab (Plate Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general settings for the profile edge reinforcement.
Name
Displays the name that is assigned to the part. Names generated by a rule include a Global
Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was
created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Specifies how the name is created. If set to a naming rule, the software automatically
generates the name for you. If you select User Defined, you can type the part name in the
Name box.
Type
Displays the object type, which in this case is Edge Reinforcement.
Naming Category
Select a category for the part. Categories specify the role of the part in the model. The
category is also used by the naming rule to name the part.
Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system of the part.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the root parent plate system. It is
inherited from the parent system.
Description
Type a description for the edge reinforcement profile.
Specification
Select a specification for the edge reinforcement profile.
Symmetry
Displays the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by the Board
Management Service.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 165

Plate Edge Reinforcement Part

Material Tab (Plate Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the material settings for the plate edge reinforcement.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.

General Tab (Plate Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies properties of the plate edge reinforcement.

Routing Tab
Specifies routing properties for the part. By default, no routing properties are set.
Create
Sets routing properties for the part.
Delete
Deletes the routing properties for the part.
Rule
Specifies a predefined rule set or a user-defined rule that is applicable to the part.
Workcenter
Select an assembly workcenter where the part is produced from a facility-defined rule set.
The list contains all available workcenters regardless of their level in the workcenter
hierarchy. Examples of workcenters include docks, shops, bays, and panel lines.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 166

Plate Edge Reinforcement Part

Workcenters may also be areas and zones where a block is assembled from multiple
assemblies.
Stage Code
Specifies the workcenter code.
No. Of Actions
Specifies the number of actions required to produce the part.
Action
Specifies the name of the action.
Machine
Specifies the type of machine used to perform the required operation.
Code
Specifies the machine code.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 167

SECTION 16

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

Places a standalone profile part along the free edge of a plate part. A free edge is defined as
a plate edge that has no logical connections. Therefore, a free edge can be a hole edge, an
edge made by use of a boundary curve, or an edge defined by use of a grid plane.

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to place a profile edge reinforcement part in the model.
Edge Reinforcement Properties
Activates the Plate Edge Reinforcement Part Properties dialog box, which you use to
view and modify the properties of the edge reinforcement system that you are about to place
in the model. For more information, see Plate Edge Reinforcement Part Properties Dialog
Box (on page 437).
Pick Edge
Select the plate edge to reinforce.
Define Orientation
Specify the orientation of the edge reinforcement.
Boundary 1
Define the start point for the boundary of the edge reinforcement.
Boundary 2
Define the end point for the boundary of the edge reinforcement.
Finish
Places the edge reinforcement using the defined parameters.
Rule
Specifies the rule Smart 3D uses to place the edge reinforcement part.
Cancel
Clears all selected edges or boundaries.
Accept
Accepts all selected edges or boundaries.
Section Type
Select the profile cross-section type.
Section Size
Select the profile cross-section size.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 168

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

Bounded By
Select how the profile part is bounded.
Name
Displays the name of the edge reinforcement that you are placing.

What do you want to do?

 Place an edge reinforcement profile part (on page 169)
 Modify an edge reinforcement profile part (on page 169)
 Delete an edge reinforcement profile part (on page 170)

Place an edge reinforcement profile part

1. Click Profile Edge Reinforcement Part on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the edge to reinforce.
3. Click Accept .
4. Define the orientation of the profile.
5. Click Accept .
6. Define the boundaries for the profile.
7. Click Accept .
8. Click Finish.

Modify an edge reinforcement profile part

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Profile Edge Reinforcement Parts in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the edge reinforcement profile part to modify.
4. Use the commands on the ribbon to modify the profile part as needed.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 169

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

Delete an edge reinforcement profile part

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Profile Edge Reinforcement Parts in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the edge reinforcement profile part to delete.
4. Click Edit > Delete.

Profile Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the edge reinforcement profile part that you are editing. Default
properties are inherited from the parent system of the part.
Main Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 174)
Cross Section Tab (on page 171)
Section Orientation Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 172)
Relationships Tab (on page 400)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)
General Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 173)
Weight & CG Tab (on page 407)
Extended User Attributes Tab (on page 407)
Routing Tab (on page 166)

Main Tab (Plate Edge Reinforcement Part Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the general properties of the standalone plate edge reinforcement part.
Name
Displays the name that will be assigned to the part. Names generated by a rule include a
Global Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database
was created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare
Guide.
Rule
Specifies how the name is created. If set to a naming rule, the software automatically
generates the name for you. If you select User Defined, you can type in the part name
yourself in the Name box.
Type
Displays the object type, which in this case is Edge Reinforcement.
Naming Category
Select a category for the part. Categories specify the role of the part in the model. The
category is also used by the naming rule to name the part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 170

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system of the part.
Specification
Select the structural specification for the plate system.
Description
Type a description for the plate system.
Tightness
Select the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Symmetry
Displays the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by the Board
Management Service.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by the Board Management Service.
See Also
Plate Edge Reinforcement Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 437)

Cross Section Tab

Specifies the cross-section settings for the part.
Section Type
Displays the profile section type.
Section Size
Displays the profile section size.
Material
Displays the material for the part.
Grade
Displays the material grade for the part.
The tab also displays the graphic and parameters of the cross-section symbol used
by the part.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 171

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

Section Orientation Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part

Properties Dialog Box)
Specifies the section orientation settings for the edge reinforcement profile part.
Position
Displays how the cross-section of the profile is attached to the free edge.
Primary Orientation
Displays which side of the plate to place the edge reinforcement profile.
Secondary Orientation
Displays the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical crossing-sections and the
direction of the flange and web thickness for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Parent System Type
Displays the object type of the parent system.
Offset
Displays the distance that the cross-section is offset from free edge or from the plate face.
Mounting Face
Displays the cross-section face to mount to the plate.
Load Point
Displays the cross-section load point through which the landing curve passes.
Start Connection Method
Defines the method of connecting the beginning of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added
as part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.
End Connection Method
Defines the method of connecting the end of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added
as part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 172

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.

Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.

General Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties

Dialog Box)
Specifies general properties of the stiffener part. Some properties displayed duplicate those
available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. The property name appears on the left side of the
grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
flangeDirection
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical crossing-sections or the
direction of the flange and web thickness for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
NamingCategory
Displays the codelist value for Naming Category, defined on the Main tab. For more
information, see Main Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 174).
orientation
Specifies the orientation of the edge reinforcement.
ProfileType
Specifies the profile type of the part. The list is defined by the StrMfgProfileType codelist.
webThicknessOffset
Specifies the offset direction along the plate face.
webThicknessOrientation
This property is not used.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 173

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

Main Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the general properties of the edge reinforcement profile part.
Name
Specifies the name of the edge reinforcement profile part. Names generated by a rule
include a Global Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model
database was created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global
Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the edge reinforcement profile part.
 Select StiffenerPartRule to create a name based on the parent root profile system
name, the location within the parent root profile system, and the parent assembly name.
 Select User Defined to name the part yourself by using the appropriate box.
Type
Displays the type of the part. It is inherited from the parent system.
Naming Category
Select a category for the edge reinforcement profile part. Categories specify the role of the
part in the model.
Parent System
Displays the parent system for the edge reinforcement profile part.
Specification
Displays the structural specification for the edge reinforcement profile part. It is inherited
from the parent system.
Description
Type a description for the edge reinforcement profile part.
Board Management
Symmetry
Specifies the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by Tools >
Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Manually Override
When selected, allows you to manually change the Symmetry value.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 174

SECTION 17

Place Multiple Corner Features

Place Multiple Corner Features Ribbon

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 175

Place Multiple Corner Features

Place multiple corner features

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 176

SECTION 18

Creating Straking Seams

The commands in the straking seams category provide the method to place one or more
straking seams in the model. By using straking seams, you can split detailed plate parts into
sizes that can be manufactured, as determined by what can be purchased from a mill and what
can be built in a work center. Creating a straking seam immediately splits the part and creates
the associated assembly and physical connections. Plate parts split by straking seams have the
original part of their parent.

 Straking seams can only be placed on detailed parts. Therefore, you must run Execute
Detailing before you can place straking seams.
 When an object is split, or a split is deleted, the software places the resulting parts in the
same permission group as the original parts. In ambiguous cases where you do not have
permission to update parts or connections, the software places the original parts on the To
Do List in a To Be Deleted state and assigns the new parts to the active permission group.
A user with write access to the permission group assigned to the original parts must update
the To Do List to delete the original parts. For more information, see Splitting Objects and
Permission Groups (on page 179).

Straking Seam by Intersection - Creates a straking seam and splits the

selected detailed plate part by defining the landing curve as the intersection of
the selected plate part and a grid plane. For more information, see Straking
Seam by Intersection (on page 180).

Straking Seam by Intersection

Creates a straking seam on the selected plate system by defining the landing curve of the
seam as the intersection of the selected plate system and a grid plane.
You can control the boundaries of the seam by selecting the parent plate system, seam, or split
knuckle line that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software uses
the landing curve ends as the seam boundaries. Seams must end at a plate part boundary,
including openings, or another seam on the same plate part.
When an object is split, or a split is deleted, the software places the resulting parts in
the same permission group as the original parts. In ambiguous cases where you do not have
permission to update parts or connections, the software places the original parts on the To Do
List in a To Be Deleted state and assigns the new parts to the active permission group. A user
with write access to the permission group assigned to the original parts must update the To Do
List to delete the original parts. For more information, see Splitting Objects and Permission
Groups (on page 179).

Straking Seam by Intersection Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to place a straking seam in the model.
Seam by Intersection Properties
Activates the Seam By Intersection Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the seam that you are about to place in the model. For more
information, see Seam By Properties Dialog Box (on page 183).
Plate Part
Select the plate parts to split. You can select multiple plate parts to place multiple straking
seams at the same time. The software uses the same boundaries for each seam. After
placement, the seams are unrelated to each other and can be edited as individual entities.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 180

Creating Straking Seams

Intersecting Objects
Select the objects that intersect the plate system for which to generate seams.
Define Boundaries
Define the boundaries of the seam. You can define the boundaries by selecting objects in
the model. If you select objects in the model, and those objects are moved, the software
automatically resizes the seam to maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define
Boundary controls described below.
Finish
Creates the seam using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Clears all selected plates or boundaries.
Accept
Accepts all selected plates or boundaries.
Define Boundary Controls

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 98).

What do you want to do?

 Place a seam by intersection (on page 182)
 Modify a seam (on page 182)
 Delete a seam (on page 182)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 181

Creating Straking Seams

Place a seam by intersection

1. Click Straking Seam by Intersection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system to receive the seams and butts.
3. Click Accept .
4. Select an intersecting grid plane or intersecting plate where you want the seam.
5. Click Accept .
6. Define the seam boundaries.
Pick boundaries (on page 33)
7. Click Accept .
8. Click Finish to place the seam.

 If you do not select boundaries, the software uses the entire length of the base curve to
apply to the resulting seam curves.
 A straking seam is always attached to a detailed plate part.
 You can define properties for the seam to provide a unique identification.

Modify a seam
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Seams in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the seam to modify.
4. Use the commands on the ribbon to edit the seam as needed.
When you select multiple objects, you can change the properties that those objects
have in common. If the value of the property is the same for the objects that you have selected,
that value displays in the ribbon bar. If the values are different, the box for that value is blank.
Changing the value of a property makes that the value for all of the selected objects.

Delete a seam
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Seams in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the seam to delete.
4. Click Edit > Delete.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 182

Creating Straking Seams

Seam By Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the seam that you are placing or editing.
See Also
Main Tab (Seam by Properties Dialog Box) (on page 183)

Main Tab (Seam by Properties Dialog Box)

Name
Specifies the name of the seam.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the seam.
 StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent Name>-
<"IJSeam"><Index Number>. For example, D0-1DCK-1-IJSeam1, where D0 is the
reference plane, 1DCK is an index number appended by the plate type (Deck in this
example), 1 is the Workshare Location ID, and IJSeam1 is "IJSeam" appended by an
index number.
 StdPlanningSeamNameRule - Assigns an index number to each seam on a plate. The
index starts at 0001 for each plate.
 User Defined - Allows you to type a name in the Name box.
Type
Specifies the type of seam that you are placing.
Landing Curve Definition Method
Displays how the landing curve for the seam was defined.
Board Management
Symmetry
Specifies the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by Tools >
Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Manually Override
When selected, allows you to manually change the Symmetry value.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined by
Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 183

Creating Straking Seams

Straking Seam by Offset Command

Creates a straking seam on the selected plate part by defining the landing curve as being
offset from an existing curve (another seam, plate boundary, profile, or grid plane).
You can control the boundaries of the seam by selecting the parent plate system, seam, or split
knuckle line that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software uses
the landing curve ends as the seam boundaries. Seams must end at a plate part boundary,
including openings, or another seam on the same plate part.
When an object is split, or a split is deleted, the software places the resulting parts in
the same permission group as the original parts. In ambiguous cases where you do not have
permission to update parts or connections, the software places the original parts on the To Do
List in a To Be Deleted state and assigns the new parts to the active permission group. A user
with write access to the permission group assigned to the original parts must update the To Do
List to delete the original parts. For more information, see Splitting Objects and Permission
Groups (on page 179).

Straking Seam by Offset Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to place an offset seam in the model.
Seam by Offset Properties
Activates the Seam By Offset Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the seam that you are about to place in the model. For more information, see
Seam By Offset Properties Dialog Box (on page 186).
Plate System
Select the plate part that you want to split. You can select multiple a plate part to place
multiple straking seams at the same time. The software uses the same information for each
seam. After placement, the seams are unrelated to each other and can be edited as
individual entities.
Base Curve
Select an existing curve or grid plane from which to offset the seam. The intersection of the
grid plane and the plate part defines the base curve.
Offset Curve Definition
Define the offset parameters and direction from the base curve. See the Offset Curve
Definition controls described below.
Boundary Definition
Define the boundaries of the seam. You can define the boundaries by selecting objects in
the model. If you select objects in the model, and those objects are moved, the software
automatically resizes the seam to maintain the boundary relationship. See the Boundary
Definition controls described below.
Finish
Places the seam using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Clears all selected objects.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 184

Creating Straking Seams

Accept
Accepts all selected objects.

Offset Curve Definition Controls

Unlimited
Defines offset curves without a stop limit.

Stop Limit
Defines offset curves with a stop limit. By using a stop limit, you can select an edge, profile
landing curve, connection reference curve, or seam to control the landing curves being
created. If you type an offset value and the Offset lock is locked, then landing curves are
applied at increments of the offset value until the selected stop limit is reached. If the Offset
lock is unlocked and a value has been defined for Count, then the landing curves equal to
the number typed in the Count box are equally spaced between the base curve and the
stop limit.
/ Offset lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by mouse moves. This option
is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane option.
Offset
Specify the offset distance between the base curve and the landing curve that you are
defining. If you type 0, the landing curve is place on the base curve. This box may also
display the offset distance as defined by mouse movements.
Method
Select an offset method. You can select transverse, longitudinal, vertical, or girth.
Count
Specify how many seams should be created, each equally spaced by increments of the
offset value.
Step
Defines an increment that the system should use as you dynamically move the mouse. If
you have typed a value in the Offset box, then this control is not used.

Boundary Definition Controls

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 185

Creating Straking Seams

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 98).

Place a straking seam by offset

Add Intersecting Item

Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as reference geometry.
These extra objects appear in the Draft 2D environment.
Add Projection Item
Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane to use as reference
geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear in the
Draft 2D environment.

Constraint Table
Activates the Constraint Table dialog from which you can modify sketch curve constraint
values without going back into the Sketch 2D environment. A sketch curve must have
already been defined in Sketch 2D before this option is available.
 Type - Displays the constraint type. You cannot edit the type.
 Name - Displays the constraint name. You cannot edit the name.
 Value - Defines the constraint value. Include the units of measurement when you edit
the value: deg, mm, in, and so forth. You cannot edit a value if it is derived by a formula.
 Value Type - Displays the value type: angle, radial, linear, and so forth. You cannot edit
the value type.
 Formula - Displays the formula used to derive the constraint value. You cannot edit
formulas, nor can you edit values derived by formulas.
 Layers - Filters which constraints display in the dialog based on the Sketch 2D layer to
which they belong. By default, all constraints on all layers display.
Sketch 2D
Opens the Draft 2D environment in which you can draw the curve.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in
the Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Projection Item option.

Boundary Definition Controls

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Solve Ambiguity
If the objects that you selected in the model for the boundary define an ambiguous solution,

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 189

Creating Straking Seams

then the software prompts you to select one bounded section to clarify the needed
boundary. This ambiguity only occurs if one of the boundaries, such as the hull, wraps
around both sides of object. Move the cursor over a bounded section, and then click to
select.

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 98).

Place a straking seam by projection

1. Click Straking Seam by Projection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate part for the straking seam.
3. Click Accept .
4. Specify the plane for the seam sketch using one of the following methods:
Define an offset plane (on page 30)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 31)
Define a plane using three points (on page 31)

5. Click Add Intersecting Item .

6. Select objects in the Model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects will appear in the Sketch 2D environment.
7. Click Add Projection Item .
8. Select objects in the Model that do not intersect the sketching plane to use as reference
geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear in the
Sketch 2D environment.
9. Click Sketch 2D .
10. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the seam curve.
11. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.
12. Click Accept .
13. Define the seam boundaries.
Pick boundaries (on page 33)
14. Click Accept .
15. Click Finish to place the seam.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 190

Creating Straking Seams

Seam By Projection Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the seam that you are placing or editing.
See Also
Main Tab (Seam By Projection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 191)

Main Tab (Seam By Projection Properties Dialog Box)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 191

Creating Straking Seams

Straking Seam by Table

Creates a straking seam on the selected plate part by defining the landing curve as
coordinates in a table.
You can control the boundaries of the seam by selecting the parent plate system, seam, or split
knuckle line that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software uses
the landing curve ends as the seam boundaries. Seams must end at a plate part boundary,
including openings, or another seam on the same plate system.
When an object is split, or a split is deleted, the software places the resulting parts in
the same permission group as the original parts. In ambiguous cases where you do not have
permission to update parts or connections, the software places the original parts on the To Do
List in a To Be Deleted state and assigns the new parts to the active permission group. A user
with write access to the permission group assigned to the original parts must update the To Do
List to delete the original parts. For more information, see Splitting Objects and Permission
Groups (on page 179).

Straking Seam By Table Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to place a straking seam in the model.
Seam by Table Properties
Activates the Seam By Table Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the seam that you are about to place in the model. For more information, see
Seam By Table Properties Dialog Box (on page 199).
Plate Part
Select the plate part for the seam. You can select a plate part to place a single seam.
Landing Curve Table
Activates a table where you can define the landing curve coordinates for the seam. For
more information, see Landing Curve Table Dialog Box (on page 195).
Boundary Definition
Define the boundaries of the seam. You can define the boundaries by selecting objects in
the model. If you select objects in the model, and those objects are moved, the software
automatically resizes the seam to maintain the boundary relationship. See the Boundary
Definition controls described below.
Finish
Places the seam using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.

Boundary Definition Controls

Pick Boundaries

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 192

Import points from Microsoft Excel

1. Open the Landing Curve Table dialog box.
2. Open the Microsoft Excel file that contains the points to import.
3. Highlight the cells in the Excel file and copy them
4. In the Landing Curve Table, highlight the number of rows that you need to paste. Then,
right-click and select Paste Cell.

Landing Curve Table Dialog Box

Specifies a landing curve by defining X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates of points along the landing curve.
Each point along the landing curve is defined on a single row in the table. You must define two

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 195

Creating Straking Seams

out of the three point coordinates. The software derives the third coordinate for you, and
highlights the derived coordinate in blue.

X Reference
Select a transverse bulkhead, frame plane, or another YZ grid plane to specify the X-
coordinate of the landing curve point. You can also explicitly specify the X-coordinate by
typing the point's location along the X-axis.
X Offset
Type an offset value from the value in the X Reference box.
Y Reference
Select a buttock plane, longitudinal plane, or another XZ grid plane to specify the Y-
coordinate of the landing curve point. You can also explicitly specify the Y- coordinate by
typing the point's location along the Y-axis.
Y Offset
Type an offset value from the value in the Y Reference box.
Z Reference
Select the waterline plane, horizontal plane, or another XY grid plane to specify the Z-
coordinate of the landing curve point. You can also explicitly specify the Z- coordinate by
typing the point's location along the Z-axis.
Z Offset
Type an offset value from the value in the Z Reference box.
Point Type
Select an option from the menu on the point type that you are placing.
Definition Point

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 196

Creating Straking Seams

Select this option if the coordinate on the row defines a point on the landing curve.
Points for which you have typed coordinates are usually definition points.
Coordinates that are not definition points are not saved as part of the landing curve
definition.
Knuckle
Select this option if the coordinate on the row defines a knuckle point.
Display
Select this option if the coordinate on the row defines a display point.
Curvature Vector Display Method
Specifies how the curvature vectors appear when you click Preview. Select Number of
vectors to specify a fixed number of vectors that the software is to distribute evenly along
the landing curve. Specify the number of vectors in the Count box. Select Vector spacing
to place vectors along the landing curve a fixed distance apart. The software determines the
number of vectors based on the landing curve length and the spacing distance specified in
the Spacing box.
Count
Specifies the number of vectors to distribute evenly along the landing curve preview. This
option is only available when Curvature Vector Display Method is set to Number of
vectors.
Range
Select where along the landing curve preview to display curvature vectors. Select Entire
Curve to display curvature vectors along the entire landing curve. Select Between
Definition Points to display curvature vectors only between definition points.
Scale Factor
Define a scaling factor value for the curvature vectors. The larger the value, the larger the
curvature vectors appear in the graphic view.
Derived Points in the Table
These options control when and how the software derives points between definition points
that you define.
 X: Transverse - Select this option to have the software derive points for each X grid
plane that intersects the landing curve. You must select a coordinate system.
 Y: Buttock - Select this option to have the software derive points for each Y grid plane
that intersects the landing curve. You must select a coordinate system.
 Z: Waterline - Select this option to have the software derive points for each Z plane that
intersects the landing curve. You must select a coordinate system.
Intersection Plane
 BasePlane
 From
 Angle
 Normal to Base Plane

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 197

Creating Straking Seams

 Restore Defaults

Preview
Displays the landing curve, as currently defined by the points in the table, in the model. You
can select Preview multiple times to see changes made to the landing curve as you add
and edit points in the table.
Print
Prints a copy of the landing curve table as it is currently defined.
Close
Closes the dialog box.

Right-Click Menu Commands

There are several right-click commands available to help in defining the points in the table.
Cut Cell
Removes the contents of the selected cell and moves the contents to the Clipboard.
Copy Cell
Moves a copy of the selected cell contents to the Clipboard.
Paste Cell
Places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the cell.
Cut Row
Removes the contents of the selected row and moves the contents to the Clipboard.
Copy Row
Moves a copy of the selected row contents to the Clipboard.
Paste Row
Places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the row, replacing any existing values in the row.
Paste Reverse
If more than one row is copied, this command places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the
same number of rows but in reverse order, replacing any existing values in the row.
Insert Cut/Copied Rows
Inserts the row on the Clipboard into a new row in the table.
Insert Reverse Rows
If more than one row is copied, this command inserts the rows from the Clipboard in the
table in reverse order.
Delete

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 198

Creating Straking Seams

Removes the contents of the selected cell.

Insert Row
Inserts a new, empty row into the table above the selected row.
Remove Row
Removes the selected row from the table.
Make Derived
Marks the selected reference as the one that the software derives.

Seam By Table Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the seam that you are placing or editing.
See Also
Landing Curve Table Dialog Box (on page 195)
Main Tab (Seam By Table Properties Dialog Box) (on page 199)

Main Tab (Seam By Table Properties Dialog Box)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 199

Creating Straking Seams

Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
See Also
Seam By Table Properties Dialog Box (on page 199)

Modify Profile Straking Seam

Select an existing straking seam to modify its properties.

Modify Profile Straking Seam Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to modify a straking seam.
Properties
Activates the Profile Straking Seam Properties dialog box, which you can use to edit
properties for the seam. For more information, see Profile Straking Seam Properties Dialog
Box (on page 201).
Profile System
Select the profile system or the plate system that has associated profile systems upon which
to place a straking seam. The seams are placed on the child detailed parts of the profile
systems. You can select stiffener profile systems or linear beam profile systems.
References
Select objects that intersect the detailed profile part at which to place the seam. You can
select objects in either the graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer. Objects that you
can select as references include: reference curves, reference planes, plate systems, edge
reinforcement systems, seams (design, planning, and straking), profile systems (landing
curve), and edge ports including openings.
Finish
Modifies the seam using the parameters that you have defined.
Cancel
Rejects the selected objects.
Accept
Accepts the selected objects and advances the command to the next step.
Offset Method
Select the offset method, if needed.
Offset Value
Type the offset value. You can specify the direction of the offset by typing a plus (+) or
minus (-) sign in front of the offset value. A positive value is offset in the positive direction of
the closest main coordinate system axis.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 200

Creating Straking Seams

Profile Straking Seam Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the profile straking seam.
See Also
Main Tab (Profile Straking Seam Properties Dialog Box) (on page 201)

Main Tab (Profile Straking Seam Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general settings for the profile straking seam.
Name
Displays the name to assign to the profile straking seam. Names generated by a rule include
a Global Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database
was created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare
Guide.
Rule
Specifies how the name is created. If set to a naming rule, the software automatically
generates the name for you. If you select User Defined, you can type in the straking seam
name in the Name box.
Type
Displays the object type, which in this case is straking seam.
Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system of the straking seam.
See Also
Profile Straking Seam Properties Dialog Box (on page 201)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 201

SECTION 19

Split Physical Connection

Splits an existing physical connection at a location that you specify.

When an object is split, or a split is deleted, the software places the resulting parts in
the same permission group as the original parts. In ambiguous cases where the user does not
have permission to update parts or connections, the software places the original parts on the To
Do List in a To Be Deleted state and assigns the new parts to the active permission group. A
user with write access to the permission group assigned to the original parts must update the To
Do List to delete the original parts. For more information, see Splitting Objects and Permission
Groups (on page 179).

Split Physical Connection Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to split an existing physical connection at a location that you
specify.
Split Point Properties
Activates the Split Point Properties dialog box. This option is only available in the
modification mode. For more information, see Split Point Properties Dialog Box (on page
204).

Physical Connection
Select one or more physical connections to split, either graphically in the active window or
through the Workspace Explorer.

Reference
Select a reference for positioning the split locations.
Split Point Definition by Geometric Construction
Allows creation of the split point directly in a graphic view by using the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, the Geometric Construction ribbon, and the Geometric
Construction Explorer. This option is the 3D equivalent to Sketch 2D. For more
information, see Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box.
Finish
Processes the Split Physical Connection command, and commits the changes to the
database.

Reference Definition Method

Defines how the split point is created. Click Reference Definition Method to create a
reference to the split point using a point on the physical connection. This point is used as a
reference. If it is not selected, the split point is created with the selected object as the
reference. Reference Definition Method is not selected by default. Press SHIFT to
toggle between using the points or the objects as a reference.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 202

Split Physical Connection

Cancel
Cancels the selection.
Accept
Accepts the selection.
Offset Method
Select the offset method, if needed.

Split a physical connection

Split a physical connection by point
1. Click Split Physical Connection .
2. Select one or more physical connections to split, either graphically in the active window or
through the Workspace Explore.
3. Click Accept .

4. Click Reference .

5. Click Reference Definition Method .

6. Select a point on the physical connection geometry to use as a reference for positioning the
split location.
7. Click Finish to commit the split to the database.

Split a physical connection by object

1. Click Split Physical Connection .
2. Select one or more physical connections to split, either graphically in the active window or
through the Workspace Explore.
3. Click Accept .

4. Click Reference .
5. Select a reference to position the split location.
6. Select Offset Method and Distance, if required.
7. Click Finish to commit the split to the database.

Split a physical connection by geometry construction

1. Click Split Physical Connection .
2. Select one or more physical connections to split, either graphically in the active window or
through the Workspace Explore.
3. Click Accept .
4. Click 3D .

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 203

Split Physical Connection

The Geometric Construction Palette dialog box displays. The Geometric Construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Explorer also display.
5. Create a geometric construction point at which to position the split location.
6. Click Finish to commit the split to the database.

 The split physical connections are also displayed below the split point in the Workspace
Explorer under the parent physical connection.
 You can also split a physical connection where the reference crosses through a gap by
selecting the required offset method and value.
 You can also press CTRL + ENTER to commit the split to the database.
 Offset Method is only available when you split a physical connection by object.
 If you select multiple physical connections by point or by geometry construction, the
software splits the physical connection at only one point.

Split Point Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the split point that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Split Point Properties Dialog Box) (on page 204)
Relationships Tab (on page 400)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)

General Tab (Split Point Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the properties for the split point.
Category
Select the type of properties to view for the selected split point.
Name
Specifies the name of the split point.
Name Rule
Select the name rule to use to name the split point.
The format for a default name rule is <parent physical connection name>-split
point-<naming counter>. If you change the name of the split point, the name rule changes to
User Defined.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 204

Split Physical Connection

Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box

Specifies a geometric construction point interface. The interface allows you to create point
geometry directly in a graphic view. The Geometric Construction Palette appears when you
click the option on the Split Physical Connection ribbon .
The Geometric Construction Explorer also appears when is clicked. As geometry is
created, a hierarchical list of applicable surfaces, curves, and points display.
Filters
Limits the available macros on a tab to the selected type.
Clear Recent
Removes recently selected macros from the Recent tab.
Help
Displays help for the selected macro in a preview window. If no help is available, a preview
of the selected macro displays.
The Geometric Construction Palette contains the following tabs:
 Points - Displays interfaces for creating points.
 Recent - Displays geometric construction interfaces recently selected on the other tabs.
Click Clear Recent to remove interfaces from this tab.
The following geometric construction types are available.

Points Along Curve - Creates evenly-spaced points along a curve. For more
information, see Points Along Curve (on page 256).

Point from Coordinate System - Creates a point at the defined X, Y, and Z

coordinates of the selected coordinate system. For more information, see Point
from Coordinate System.

Point Along Curve on Surface - Creates a point along a curve relative to the
selected coordinate system. For more information, see Point Along Curve on
Surface.

Vertices from Curve or Surface - Creates points at the vertices of a curve or

surface. For more information, see Vertices From Curve or Surface (on page
267).

Point by Curves - Creates a point at the intersection of two curves. For more
information, see Point by Curves (on page 240).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 205

Split Physical Connection

Point by Curve and Surface - Creates a point at the intersection of a curve and
a surface. For more information, see Point by Curve and Surface (on page 236).

Point by Surfaces - Creates a point at the intersection of three surfaces. For

more information, see Point by Surfaces (on page 243).

Point Along Curve - Creates a point at a distance along a curve. For more
information, see Point Along Curve (on page 206).

Point at Curve Middle - Creates a point at the middle of a curve. For more
information, see Point at Curve Middle (on page 226).

Point at Curve Start - Creates a point at the beginning of a curve. For more
information, see Point at Curve Start (on page 233).

Point at Curve End - Creates a point at the end of a curve. For more
information, see Point at Curve End (on page 223).

After you select an interface, the ribbon for that interface appears.
The Geometric Construction Explorer also appears when is clicked. As geometry is
created, a hierarchical list of applicable surfaces, curves, and points display.

Geometric Construction Explorer (on page 271)

Point Along Curve

Tooltip: PointAlongCurve
Creates a point at a distance along a curve.

Required Input Output

Curve, line, or edge Point
Optional Input
Reference point
Projection surface
Parameters
Distance

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 206

Split Physical Connection

Point Along Curve Ribbon

Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1
Specifies the curve on which the point is placed.

Specifies a reference point for measurement of the point location. If no reference point is
selected, then the starting end of the curve is used. This value is optional.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 207

Split Physical Connection

The selected tracking point must be an existing point previously created with
Insert > Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point
interfaces.

Specifies a surface on which to project the point. This value is optional.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction.
The input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 208

Split Physical Connection

Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until
you click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Distance
Defines the distance of the point from the starting end of the curve, or from optional
reference point .
Track Flag
Controls how the tracking point is used when an ambiguity exists. Select Near to use
the curve nearest to the tracking point. Select Far to use the curve farthest from the tracking
point.

What do you want to do?

 Place a point along a curve (on page 209)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 266)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 266)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 267)

Place a point along a curve

1. Select a curve, such as a profile landing curve, a connection, or a geometric construction
curve.
2. If using a reference point, create the point with Insert > Control Point, Insert >
Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box)
3. Click PointAlongCurve on the Geometric Construction Palette.
4. Select the same curve.
5. Optionally, click , and select the reference point.
6. In the Distance box, type a value.
A preview of the point appears at the defined distance from the start of the curve or the
reference point.
7. If more than one solution is possible, click , and select the needed value for Track Flag.
If changing the value for Track Flag does not give the needed solution, you may
need to first create a point that you then select after clicking . The point can be created

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 209

Split Physical Connection

with Insert > Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction
point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box)
8. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PointAlongCurve in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
9. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
10. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Point Along Curve on Surface

Tooltip: PointAlongCurveOnSurface

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 210

Split Physical Connection

Creates a point along a curve on a surface relative to the selected coordinate system.

Required Input Output

1 - Coordinate system Point along the curve
2 -Surface
3 - Reference plane intersecting the
surface
6 - Supporting plane intersecting the
surface
Optional Input
Points or curves to define reference plane
3
Parameters
Offset method and value
Distance method and value

Point Along Curve on Surface Ribbon (for geometric constructions)

Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 211

Split Physical Connection

Specifies a point used to define the plane intersecting the surface. This option is only
available if a point or curve is selected for 3.

Specifies a third point used to define the plane intersecting the surface. This option is only
available if points are selected for 3 and .

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 212

Split Physical Connection

6
Specifies a supporting plane intersecting the surface or a curve or point used to define the
plane. The curve created by this intersection is the supporting curve along which the new
point is located as defined by Distance and Distance Method.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - No background when the value of the original geometric

construction is retained.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

suggested value.
Multi-editing
When modifying multiple existing geometric constructions and an input or parameter is available
for all selections:

 - Blue background when the input is the same for all selected geometric constructions.

 - No background with pink underline when the input is different for all selected
geometric constructions.

 - Blue background with pink underline when the input is different for some selected
geometric constructions.

 - Yellow background with pink underline when all inputs that were originally the same
have been changed. Remaining values have not been changed.

 - No background and no text displayed when the value of the parameter is

different for the selected geometric constructions. Each value, along with the applicable

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 217

Split Physical Connection

geometric constructions, are available as selections in the box, as shown in the following
example.

Reject
Clears the current selection.
Accept
Accepts the current selections, and displays a preview.
Finish
Completes geometric construction definition. The ribbon is still displayed, and parameters
for additional geometry can be defined.
Name
Specifies the name of the geometric construction.
Parent
Specifies a parent for the geometric construction. Select one of the following:
 The current model. This is the default value.
 More - Select a system in the model.
The New GC Set option is not used for topological points.
Offset
Defines the offset distance of the point along the reference curve.
Offset Direction
Defines the offset direction (with respect to the selected coordinate system 1) along the
reference curve. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This option is available when Offset is not
set to 0.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 218

Split Physical Connection

4. Select a surface, such as a plate system or reference plane.
5. Select a plane intersecting the surface. The Offset direction is along the reference curve
created by this intersection.
6. Select another plane intersecting the surface and the reference curve. The Distance
direction is along the supporting curve created at the intersection with the surface.
7. Select a value for Distance Method.
8. Type the needed values for Offset and Distance.
A preview point in green appears at the intersection of the surface, reference curve, and
supporting curve. If more than one point appears, then more than one solution is possible.
9. If multiple points appear, perform one of the following steps to resolve the ambiguity:
 If the surface is complex (a plane intersects it more than once), then select a coordinate
axis direction for Inter Ambiguity.
 If Girth is selected for Distance Method, then select a coordinate axis direction for
Point Ambiguity.
 If two solutions are possible on opposing sides of the reference curve, then select a
coordinate axis direction for Side Ambiguity.
For each ambiguity, select a value that is compatible with the orientation of the
points.
A single green preview point is now visible.
10. Optionally, type a name for the point.
11. Optionally, select More in the Parent box, and select a parent system for the point. For
example, you can select the plate system on which you are placing the point.
12. Click Finish.
Point geometry is displayed in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Modify a topological point

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 222

Split Physical Connection

A preview of the changed geometric construction appears.

5. Click Finish.
The modified point is displayed in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Change a topological point to a different point definition

1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. In a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer, select the topological point to modify.
The point is highlighted in the graphic view, the ribbon for the topological point appears, and
the inputs are highlighted in the Workspace Explorer.
3. In the Geometric Construction box, click More.
The Select Geometric Construction dialog box appears. Only the appropriate point
geometric constructions appear.
4. Select the needed point geometric construction, and then click OK.
The new selection appears in the Geometric Construction box with a yellow background.
Options with blue backgrounds contain new values suggested by the software. Options with
white backgrounds retain the values from the previous geometric construction.
5. Make the needed changes to options on the ribbon.
Changed options have a yellow background.
6. Click Accept .
A preview of the changed point appears.
7. Click Finish.
The modified point is displayed in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Delete a topological point

1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. In a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer, select the topological point to delete.
The point is highlighted in the graphic view, the ribbon for the topological point appears, and
inputs are highlighted in the Workspace Explorer.
3. Click Delete .
The geometric construction is deleted.

Point at Curve End

Tooltip: PointAtCurveEnd
Creates a point at the end of a curve.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 223

Split Physical Connection

Required Input Output

Curve, line, or edge Point
Optional Input
Projection surface

Point at Curve End Ribbon

Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Specifies a surface on which to project the point. This value is optional.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 224

Split Physical Connection

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 225

Split Physical Connection

What do you want to do?

 Place a point at the end of a curve (on page 226)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 266)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 266)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 267)

Place a point at the end of a curve

1. Click PointAtCurveEnd on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a curve, such as a profile landing curve, a connection, or a geometric construction
curve.
A preview of the point appears at the end of the curve.
3. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PointAtCurveEnd in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
4. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
5. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

Point at Curve Middle

Tooltip: PointAtCurveMiddle
Creates a point at the middle of a curve.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 226

Split Physical Connection

Required Input Output

Curve, line, or edge Point
Optional Input
Projection surface

Point at Curve Middle Ribbon (for geometric constructions)

Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Specifies a surface on which to project the point. This value is optional.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 227

Split Physical Connection

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 228

Split Physical Connection

Point at Curve Middle Ribbon (for topological points in the Molded Forms task)
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected geometric construction. This option is only
available after selecting an existing geometric construction.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
More
Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric construction,
all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing geometric
construction, only similar interface types are available. For more information, see
[Link] and [Link] in the [Product
Folder]\Programming\Help folder, available when Programming Resources is installed.
1
Specifies the curve on which the point is placed.

Specifies a surface on which to project the point. This value is optional.

Color Coding
Creating
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 229

Split Physical Connection

Editing
When modifying an existing geometric construction to a different definition, the colors are used
differently:

 and - No background when the value of the original geometric

construction is retained.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

suggested value.
Multi-editing
When modifying multiple existing geometric constructions and an input or parameter is available
for all selections:

 - Blue background when the input is the same for all selected geometric constructions.

Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 233

Split Physical Connection

1
Specifies the curve on which the point is placed.

Specifies a surface on which to project the point. This value is optional.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 234

Split Physical Connection

What do you want to do?

 Place a point at the start of a curve (on page 235)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 266)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 266)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 267)

Place a point at the start of a curve

1. Click PointAtCurveStart on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a curve, such as a profile landing curve, a connection, or a geometric construction
curve.
A preview of the point appears at the beginning of the curve.
3. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PointAtCurveStart in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
4. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
5. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 235

Split Physical Connection

Point by Curve and Surface

Tooltip: PointByCurveAndSurface
Creates a point at the intersection of a curve and a surface.

Required Input Output

Curve, line, or edge Point
Surface, reference plane, or plate system
Optional Input
Projection surface

Point by Curve and Surface Ribbon

Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 236

Split Physical Connection

Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric

Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1
Specifies the curve.
2
Specifies the surface, reference plane, or plate system. The surface must intersect the
curve.

Specifies a tracking point used to control the direction of point placement when an ambiguity
exists. A tracking point is only needed with some curves, such as:
 A circle defined by two points and a mid-point in which there are two arcs between the
start and end points.
 A curve on multiple sides of a non-planar surface, such as a seam or reference curve
wrapping around a hull.
This value is optional.
The selected tracking point must be an existing point previously created with
Insert > Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point
interfaces.

Specifies a surface on which to project the point. This value is optional.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 237

Split Physical Connection

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 241

Split Physical Connection

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Track Flag
Controls how the tracking point is used when an ambiguity exists. Select Near to use
the curve nearest to the tracking point. Select Far to use the curve farthest from the tracking
point.

What do you want to do?

 Place a point at the intersection of two curves (on page 242)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 266)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 266)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 267)

Place a point at the intersection of two curves

1. Click PointByCurves on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a curve, such as a profile landing curve, a connection, or a geometric construction
curve.
3. Select a curve intersecting the first curve.
A preview of the point appears at the intersection.
4. If more than one solution is possible, click , and select the needed value for Track Flag.
If changing the value for Track Flag does not give the needed solution, you may
need to first create a point that you then select after clicking . The point can be created

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 242

Split Physical Connection

with Insert > Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction
point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box)
5. Optionally, click and select a plane.
A preview of the point projected onto the plane appears.
6. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PointByCurves in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
7. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
8. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

Point by Surfaces

Tooltip: PointBySurfaces
Creates a point at the intersection of a three surfaces.

Required Input Output

Intersecting surfaces, reference planes, or Point
plate systems

Point by Surfaces Ribbon

Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 243

Split Physical Connection

delete.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 244

Split Physical Connection

Insert > Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point
interfaces.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 245

Split Physical Connection

Track Flag
Controls how the tracking point is used an ambiguity exists. Select Near to use the
curve nearest to the tracking point. Select Far to use the curve farthest from the tracking
point.

What do you want to do?

 Place a point at the intersection of three surfaces (on page 246)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 266)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 266)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 267)

Place a point at the intersection of three surfaces

Click PointBySurfaces on the Geometric Construction Palette.
1. Select a surface, reference plane, or plate system.
2. Select a surface, reference plane, or plate system intersecting the first surface.
3. Select a surface, reference plane, or plate system intersecting the first and second surfaces,
and forming a corner.
A preview of the point appears at the intersection. In the example below, the point is at the
intersection of two plate systems and a reference plane.

4. If more than one solution is possible, click , and select the needed value for Track Flag.
If changing the value for Track Flag does not give the needed solution, you may
need to first create a point that you then select after clicking . The point can be created
with Insert > Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction
point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 246

Split Physical Connection

5. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PointBySurfaces in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
6. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
7. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

Point from Coordinate System

Tooltip: PointFromCS
Creates a point at the defined X, Y, and Z distances from the origin of the selected coordinate
system or from a selected point.

Required Input Output

Coordinate system Point
Optional Input
Reference point
Parameters
X, Y, and Z distances

Point from Coordinate System Ribbon (for geometric constructions)

Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 247

Split Physical Connection

Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1
Specifies the coordinate system.

Specifies a reference point from which X, Y, and Z distances are measured. If no reference
point is selected, the X, Y, and Z distances are measured from the origin of the coordinate
system. This value is optional.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 248

Split Physical Connection

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until
you click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
X
Specifies the distance along the X-axis from the origin or reference point.
Y
Specifies the distance along the Y-axis from the origin or reference point.
Z
Specifies the distance along the Z-axis from the origin or reference point.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 249

Split Physical Connection

Point from Coordinate System Ribbon (for topological points in the Molded Forms task)
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected geometric construction. This option is only
available after selecting an existing geometric construction.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select a different,
recently-used interface.
More
Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric construction,
all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing geometric
construction, only similar interface types are available. For more information, see
[Link] and [Link] in the [Product
Folder]\Programming\Help folder, available when Programming Resources is installed.
1
Specifies the coordinate system.

Color Coding
Creating
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 250

Split Physical Connection

Editing
When modifying an existing geometric construction to a different definition, the colors are used
differently:

 and - No background when the value of the original geometric

construction is retained.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

suggested value.
Multi-editing
When modifying multiple existing geometric constructions and an input or parameter is available
for all selections:

 - Blue background when the input is the same for all selected geometric constructions.

 - No background with pink underline when the input is different for all selected
geometric constructions.

 - Blue background with pink underline when the input is different for some selected
geometric constructions.

 - Yellow background with pink underline when all inputs that were originally the same
have been changed. Remaining values have not been changed.

 - No background and no text displayed when the value of the parameter is

different for the selected geometric constructions. Each value, along with the applicable

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 251

Split Physical Connection

geometric constructions, are available as selections in the box, as shown in the following
example.

Reject
Clears the current selections.
Accept
Accepts the current selections, and displays a preview.
Finish
Completes geometric construction definition. The ribbon is still displayed, and parameters
for additional geometry can be defined.
Name
Specifies the name of the geometric construction.
Parent
Specifies a parent for the geometric construction. Select one of the following:
 The current model. This is the default value.
 More - Select a system in the model.
The New GC Set option is not used for topological points.
X
Specifies the distance along the X-axis from the origin or reference point.
Y
Specifies the distance along the Y-axis from the origin or reference point.
Z
Specifies the distance along the Z-axis from the origin or reference point.

What do you want to do?

 Place a point by distances from a coordinate system origin (on page 253)
 Place a point by distances from a reference point (on page 253)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 266)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 266)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 267)
 Place a topological point by distances from a coordinate system origin (on page 255) (in the
Molded Forms task)
 Place a topological point by distances from a reference point (on page 255) (in the Molded
Forms task)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 252

Place a topological point by distances from a reference point

1. Create a point to use as a reference point by creating another topological point or using
Insert > Control Point.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) in the Molded Forms User's Guide
2. In the Molded Forms task, select Insert > Topological Points.
3. Click PointFromCS on the Point Palette.
4. Select a coordinate system.
5. Click , and select the reference point.
6. Type values for X, Y, and Z.
A green preview point appears. It is offset from the reference point by the X, Y, and Z values
and along the X, Y, and Z axes of the coordinate system.
7. Optionally, type a name for the point.
8. Optionally, select More in the Parent box, and select a parent system for the point.
9. Click Finish.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 255

Split Physical Connection

Point geometry is displayed in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Points Along Curve

Tooltip: PointsAlongCurve
Creates an evenly-spaced pattern of points along a curve. Points are placed by defining the
spacing between points or the total number of points.

Required Input Output

1 - Curve, line, or edge Points
Optional Input
2 - Start point
3 - End point
Parameters
Point spacing or point count

Points Along Curve Ribbon

Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 256

Split Physical Connection

Specifies points used to define the point pattern. These values are optional.
You can select the following points:
 The starting point for the point pattern.
 The ending point for the point pattern.
 A tracking point used to control the direction of point placement when an ambiguity
exists.

 The selected tracking point must be an existing point previously created with Insert >
Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point
interfaces.
 A tracking point is only needed with some curves, such as:
 A circle defined by two points and a mid-point in which there are two arcs between
the start and end points.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 257

Split Physical Connection

 A curve on multiple sides of a non-planar surface, such as a seam or reference

curve wrapping around a hull.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 258

Split Physical Connection

Direction
Specifies the direction of point creation. Select one of the following:
 Normal - Points are created from the start point to the end point.
 Reversed - Points are created from the end point to the start point.
Method
Specifies the way points are placed. Select one of the following:
 By Spacing - Points are placed at the distance specified in the Spacing box.
 As Divisors - Points are placed by the value in the Count box. The points are spaced
equally along the distance between the start and end points.
Spacing
Specifies the distance between each point. This option is only available when By Spacing is
selected in the Method box.
Count
Specifies the number of points to place. This option is only available when As Divisors is
selected in the Method box.
Debug
When set to On, displays a sphere around each point to improve visibility. The size of the
sphere is set by the value of Radius.

 Sphere preview:

 Sphere after point is created:

Radius
Specifies the sphere radius for Debug.

What do you want to do?

 Place points along a curve by spacing with start and end points (on page 260)
 Place points along a curve by spacing without start and end points (on page 261)
 Place points along a curve by count with start and end points (on page 263)
 Place points along a curve by count without start and end points (on page 264)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 266)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 266)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 267)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 259

Split Physical Connection

Place points along a curve by spacing with start and end points
1. Select a curve, such as a profile landing curve, a connection, or a geometric construction
curve.
2. Create the points needed as start and end points on the curve using Insert > Control Point,
Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box)
3. Click PointsAlongCurve on the Geometric Construction Palette.
4. Select the same curve.
5. Click , and then select a start point for the point pattern.
6. Select an end point for the point pattern.
7. In the Method box, select By Spacing.
8. In the Direction box, select Normal.
9. In the Spacing box, type a value for the distance between points.
A preview of the points displays. Spacing starts from the selected start point on the curve
and continues until the remaining curve length to the selected end point is less than the
spacing value.

1 - Start point
2 - End point

10. If the point spacing does not start from the needed end of the curve, select Reversed in the
Direction box.
Points start from the opposite end in the preview.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 260

Split Physical Connection

11. Click Continue.

Temporary geometry displays in the graphic view and as PointsAlongCurve > [Not
Named] in the Geometric Construction Explorer.

12. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.

13. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

Place points along a curve by spacing without start and end

points
1. Click PointsAlongCurve on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a curve, such as a profile landing curve, a connection, or a geometric construction
curve.
3. In the Method box, select By Spacing.
4. In the Direction box, select Normal.
5. In the Spacing box, type a value for the distance between points.
A preview of the points displays. Spacing starts from the system-defined start point of the

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 261

Split Physical Connection

selected curve and continues until the remaining curve length is less than the spacing value.

6. If the point spacing does not start from the needed end of the curve, select Reversed in the
Direction box.
Points start from the opposite end in the preview.

7. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry displays in the graphic view and as PointsAlongCurve > [Not
Named] in the Geometric Construction Explorer.

8. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.

9. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 262

Split Physical Connection

"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Place points along a curve by count with start and end points
1. Select a curve, such as a profile landing curve, a connection, or a geometric construction
curve.
2. Create the points needed as start and end points on the curve. These can be points created
with Insert > Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction
point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box)
3. Click PointsAlongCurve on the Geometric Construction Palette.
4. Select the same curve.
5. Click , and then select a start point for the point pattern.
6. Select an end point for the point pattern.
7. In the Method box, select As Divisors.
8. In the Count box, type the number of points to place.
A preview of the points displays. The points are evenly spaced between the selected start
and end points.

1 - Start point
2 - End point

9. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry displays in the graphic view and as PointsAlongCurve > [Not

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 263

Split Physical Connection

Vertices from Curve or Surface

Tooltip: VerticesFromCurveOrSurf
Creates points at the vertices of a curve or surface, including profile and seam landing curves
and plate systems. A point is created at each end point, corner point, each change in tangency
of 1° or more on a curve, and at each location where a curve crosses a surface patch boundary.

Required Input Output

Plate part or profile part Points

Vertices from Curve or Surface Ribbon

Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 267

Split Physical Connection

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 268

Split Physical Connection

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new

What do you want to do?

 Place points on vertices (on page 270)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 266)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 266)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 267)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 269

Split Physical Connection

Place points on vertices

1. Click VerticesFromCurveOrSurf on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a plate part or profile part.
Green preview points at all vertices are visible.
3. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry displays in the graphic view and as VerticesFromCurveOrSurf > [Not
Named] in the Geometric Construction Explorer. In the example below, a point is place at
each corner and at the surface patch boundary of a bounding plate.

4. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.

5. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 270

Split Physical Connection

Geometric Construction Explorer

Displays geometry related to the selected geometric construction interface. The geometry is
added after you define parameters for the interface and click Continue on the Geometric
Construction ribbon.
When creating a new object, such as a curve or a surface, the geometry is temporary and is not
named.

Geometry used to create the object is saved with the object and named. When modifying an
existing object, the geometry names display.

The Geometric Construction Explorer displays parameters in a hierarchical list similar to the
Workspace Explorer. Selecting a geometry name highlights the geometry in the graphic view.

Commands
The following commands are available by right-clicking an item in the hierarchical list:
Show
Turns on the graphical display of a hidden object in the graphic view.
Hide
Turns off the graphical display of an object in the graphic view. The names of hidden objects
display in italics in the Geometric Construction Explorer.
Export
Exports the selected geometric construction to an XML file. This command is only available
when you right-click the top level geometric construction set.
Import
Imports a previously exported geometric construction from an XML file into the workspace.
The imported geometric construction replaces any existing geometric construction. This
command is only available when you right-click the top level geometric construction set.
Export and Import are primarily intended for use by administrators creating complex
geometric construction macros. The commands can also be used to save multiple geometric
constructions, such as a set of seams or profile stiffener landing curves on a hull, that you may
not complete in a single session, or that you want to reuse in a similar model.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 271

Split Physical Connection

Color Coding
You can identify the purpose of objects by the text color:
Black text
An individual geometric construction macro.
Red text
A shared parameter used by multiple geometric constructions.
Blue text
Output geometry from the macros.

1 - Geometric
construction
2 - Shared parameter
3 - Output
4 - Geometric
construction set

Error Display
When a required input for a geometric construction is deleted, the Geometric Construction
Explorer displays an error, such as those shown in the following example.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 272

SECTION 20

Place Member Generic Assembly

Connection
Places an assembly connection between a member part and a bounding part. This
command creates the assembly connection, applies the appropriate flange and web cuts, and
creates the appropriate physical connections. A typical example is the bounding of a member to
the flange and web faces of another member.

Member generic assembly connections are typically created automatically when a

member is placed with Place Linear Member Systems and connected to a detailed plate
system or edge reinforcement. You can use Place Member Generic Assembly Connection
in situations where the connection is not created automatically.
The member is bounded to ports at the faces or edges of the bounding part. The ports used can
be edited after creating the assembly connection. This command supports the following
situations:
 A member bounded by a plate edge port.
 A member bounded by a plate face port.
 A member bounded by a flange edge port.
 A member bounded by a web or flange face port.

 The selected bounding geometry must be on detailed parts.

 This command can generate physical connections to a single plate part.

Place Member Generic Assembly Connection Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to place an assembly connection between a built-up member
part and intersecting face ports.
Properties
Activates the Assembly Connection Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the assembly connection. For more information, see Assembly

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 273

Place Member Generic Assembly Connection

Connection Properties Dialog Box (see "Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box
(Members)" on page 367).
Supported Member
Select the built-up member for which to create the assembly connection.
Supporting (Bounding) Geometry
Select a bounding port that intersects the end of the supported member to bound. If
necessary, select additional bounding ports to which to create assembly and physical
connections. Only those bounding ports that intersect the selected bounded end of the
supported member are available for you to select.
Finish
Places the assembly connection.
Cancel
Clears the current selection.
Accept
Accepts the current selection. After you accept the supporting member and bounding
geometry, the Properties button becomes active, and the Assembly Connection list is
populated with the available connection types.
Assembly Connection
Select an assembly connection type from the list.
Rule Based
Enables or disables the Assembly Connection list. Selecting this check box disables
Assembly Connection list.

Modify Member Generic Assembly Connection Ribbon

Displays the options that you use to modify an existing assembly connection between a built-up
member part and intersecting face ports.
Properties
Activates the Assembly Connection Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the assembly connection. For more information, see Assembly
Connection Properties Dialog Box (see "Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box
(Members)" on page 367).
Supported Member
Displays the built-up member for which to create the assembly connection. The supported
member cannot be modified.
Supporting (Bounding) Geometry
Select a bounding port that intersects the end of the supported member to bound. If
necessary, select additional bounding ports to which to create assembly and physical
connections. Only those bounding ports that intersect the selected bounded end of the
supported member are available for you to select.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 274

Place Member Generic Assembly Connection

Finish
Places the assembly connection.
Cancel
Clears the current selection.
Accept
Accepts the current selection. After you accept the supporting member and bounding
geometry, the Properties button becomes active, and the Assembly Connection list is
populated with the available connection types.
Assembly Connection
Select an assembly connection type from the list.
Rule Based
Enables or disables the Assembly Connection list. Selecting this check box disables the
Assembly Connection list.

What do you want to do?

 Place a member generic assembly connection (on page 275)
 Modify a smart occurrence object (on page 58)
 Delete a smart occurrence object (on page 58)
 Edit assembly connection ports (on page 276)

Place a member generic assembly connection

1. Click Place Member Generic Assembly Connection.
2. Select the member for which to create the assembly connection.
3. Select the bounding ports.

 The software creates physical connections between the supported member and the
bounding ports that you select.
 Only those ports that intersect the selected end of the supported member are available
for selection.
 If you select only the top flange of the bounding built up, the software may not be able to
completely trim the bounded member.
4. Click Accept .
The Rule Based check box must be clear to select the assembly connection
type.
5. Select the assembly connection type from the Assembly Connection list.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 275

Place Member Generic Assembly Connection

6. Click Finish.

Edit assembly connection ports

1. In a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer, select a member with an assembly
connection that you want to modify.
The member and assembly connection highlight in magenta. The assembly connection ports
highlight in yellow.

2. Select the port that you want to change.

The Modify Member Generic Assembly Connection ribbon appears with Supporting
(Bounding) Geometry as the active option.
3. To remove an existing port, select it.
The port is no longer yellow.
4. To add a new port, select it.
The port highlights in yellow.
5. Click Accept .
6. If you want to change the assembly connection type, select a new value from the Assembly
Connection list.
7. Click Finish.

 A list of members and plates connected to the selected member can be viewed on the
Relationship tab of the Assembly Connection Properties dialog box. Select a connected
object from the list to highlight it in the graphic view.
 Because you can modify the bounding geometry ports, but not the bounded member, the
Supported Member option is not available.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 276

SECTION 21

Place Manual Physical Connections

Creates a physical connection between two parts. You can manually create connections
between part types such as detailed plate parts, detailed profile parts, member parts, slabs,
walls, or any combination of these parts.
The two methods to create manual physical connections are:
1. Part and parts (default option)
2. Part and ports

Place Manual Physical Connections Ribbon - Part and Parts Method

Command Mode
Activates the part and parts method.
Select Base Part
Selects the first part.

Select Parts to Create Physical Connections with

Selects the adjoining parts to create connections.
Finish
Places the physical connections.
Make 1st Part Parent
Places the physical connection with the first object selected (parent base part). If this is not
selected, then the physical connection is placed with parts selected in the second step
(Select Parts to Create Physical Connections with).
Weld Class
Specifies the physical connection weld class that the physical connection is based on.
Weld Item
Specifies the physical connection weld item.
You must always select the weld class. After you select the correct class and
click Compute/Preview, the Weld Item list contains eligible weld items.
Rule Based
Enables or disables the Weld Item list. Selecting this check box disables the Weld Item list.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 277

Place Manual Physical Connections

Place Manual Physical Connections Ribbon - Part and Ports Method

Properties
Activates the Physical Connection Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the physical connection that you are about to place in the model.
For more information, see Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 422).
Command Mode
Activates the part and ports method.
Select Parent Part
Select the first part to be used in the physical connection. This first part is also used by
default as the parent part of the physical connection.

Select Port to be connected from Parent Part

Select an edge or surface port from the parent part. This port is used as the first input to all
physical connections to be created.

Select Other Port(s) to be connected to

Select an edge or surface port from another part that overlaps the port from the parent part.
You can select multiple ports to create multiple physical connections based on the selected
port from the parent part.
Finish
Places the physical connections.
Parent
Specifies the parent system for the physical connections.
Weld Class
Specifies the physical connection weld class (or weld item) that the physical connection is
based on.
Weld Item
Specifies the physical connection weld item if the weld class allows multiple items.

What do you want to do?

 Place a manual physical connection - part and parts method (on page 279)
 Place a manual physical connection - part and ports method (on page 279)
 Modify a smart occurrence object (on page 58)
 Delete a smart occurrence object (on page 58)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 278

Place Manual Physical Connections

Place a manual physical connection - part and parts

method
1. Click Place Manual Physical Connection .

2. Click Command Mode, and select the part and parts method .
3. Select the target part.
4. Select the surrounding parts.
5. Select a value for Weld Class.
6. Click Compute/Preview.
The Rule Based check box must be clear to select a value for the weld item.
7. If needed, select a value for Weld Item.
8. Click Finish.
One or more physical connections are created between the parts.

 You can only select parts that have overlapping geometry and do not currently have a
physical connection.
 You can select multiple parts if identical physical connections (by weld type) are created on
the selected ports.

Place a manual physical connection - part and ports

method
1. Click Place Manual Physical Connection .

2. Click Command Mode, and select the part and ports method .
3. Select the part that contains the first port for physical connection.
4. Select the port on the first part.
5. Select the overlapping port from another part.
6. Select the parent system for Parent.
7. Select a value for Weld Class.
The Rule Based check box must be clear to select a value for the weld item.
8. If needed, select a value for Weld Item.
9. Click Finish.
One or more physical connections are created between the parts containing the selected

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 279

Place Manual Physical Connections

ports.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 280

SECTION 22

Import Ship Structure

File > Import > Ship Structure, available in the Molded Forms and Structural Detailing tasks,
imports Tribon marine structure XML data into Smart 3D for planning and outfitting work.
To use this command, you must purchase and install the Intergraph Smart® 3D Tribon
Interface (SEBY812AG) from Smart 3D. Please contact Intergraph Support for licensing
information.
Before you can import the data into Smart 3D, you must export the data from Tribon Initial
Design Version M3 (Version 1.3). Smart 3D only supports XML in Schema V3 format.

Import Ship Structure Dialog Box (on page 282)

Import ship structure data

1. Export data from Tribon Initial Design to create an M3 XML file.
2. In Smart 3D, select File > Import > Ship Structure.
The Import Ship Structure dialog box appears.
3. Click the button next to the XML file or path box to navigate to the appropriate folder
location, and do one of the following:
Click Open to process all of the valid XML files in the folder.
OR
Select the individual XML file to use for import, and then click Open.
4. Click the button next to the Map file box to select the XLS map workbook to use for import,
and then click Open.
The delivered mapping file is found in [Reference Data
Folder]\SharedContent\Data\TribonTranslator\MappingFiles\SM_Mapping.xls.
5. Select a system to use as the parent for the imported data.
6. Click OK to import the Tribon data as specified, or click Submit Job to run the import as a
batch job.
For more information about setting up the batch service, see Installing Batch
Services in the Intergraph Smart® 3D Installation Guide.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 281

Import Ship Structure

Import Ship Structure Dialog Box

Sets options for importing Tribon XML data.
XML file or path
Specify the name of and path to the XML file exported from Tribon. To process multiple files
simultaneously, specify the name of and path to the folder that contains the XML files to
import. Alternatively, you can use the browse feature and navigate to the file or folder of files
to be used for import.
Map file
Specify the name of and path to the mapping file between the Tribon XML data and the
Smart 3D data in the catalog. For more information, see Import Translation Map Workbook
(on page 283).
System
Select a system in the Smart 3D model under which to place the imported data.
Log Files from import
There are 2 log files created during the import:
 FileName_ElementInfo
 This log contains the types of imported Tribon objects processed and the count of
each type.
 For example,

 FileName_Error
 This log contains the errors encountered during import of Tribon files. The log file
shows catalog and geometry errors.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 282

Import Ship Structure

 For example,

Import Translation Map Workbook

The Microsoft Excel workbook named SM_Mapping.xls is delivered in the [Reference Data
Folder]\SharedContent\Data\TribonTranslator\MappingFiles folder. This workbook maps Tribon
material and cross-section names to Smart 3D material and cross-section names.
The Cross Section worksheet maps profile cross-section names between the Tribon XML file
and Smart 3D.
Cross Section Worksheet (on page 283)
The Material worksheet maps Tribon material names to Smart 3D material names.
Material Worksheet (on page 284)

Cross Section Worksheet

The Cross Section sheet of the SM_Mapping.xls workbook maps Tribon profile cross-section
names in the XML file to Smart 3D profile cross-section names.
Section Name
Type the Smart 3D profile cross-section name.
Imported Family Name
Type the Tribon profile cross-section name as it appears in the XML file.
The last item listed for each section type is the default value for that section type.
If the cross section type is not found in the mapping file, then the default cross section of F
100*9 is used (hard coded).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 283

Import Ship Structure

Material Worksheet
The Material sheet of the SM_Mapping.xls workbook maps Tribon materials in the XML file to
Smart 3D materials.
Material Type
Type the Smart 3D material type.
Material Grade
Type the Smart 3D material grade.
Imported Material Grade
Type the Tribon material name as it appears in the XML file.
If the imported material grade is not found in the mapping file, the default material
type and grade of Steel-Carbon, A36 is used (hard coded).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 284

SECTION 23

Repairing Tribon Data

The Tribon translator software includes a command that you can use to repair the data in Tribon
XML files. The software processes only Curved Panels. Examples of data to repair include:
 Instance properties
 Profile part and seam location
The integrity of the source data is the responsibility of the generating software
(in this case, Tribon). When you repair the data with this command, you assume liability and
responsibility for the results. Intergraph does not assume any liability for the data modifications.
See Also
Repair Tribon XML (Tools Menu) (on page 285)

Repair Tribon XML (Tools Menu)

Tools > Repair Tribon XML modifies data in Tribon XML files. You can then import the
modified data into Smart 3D.

Repair Tribon XML Dialog Box (on page 286)

Repair Tribon data

1. Import Tribon data from an XML file. For more information, see Import Ship Structure (on
page 281).
2. If you see errors in the imported geometry, perform the following steps.
3. Click Tools > Repair Tribon XML.
4. On the Repair Tribon XML dialog box, specify the input file, output file, and log file for the
repair process.
5. Select the curved panels to repair.
6. Check the repair options as needed.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Apply to process the current selection, and then select View Log to open the log file.
9. Re-import the data using the repaired XML file. Objects that are different from the previous
import are automatically updated in the model.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 285

Repairing Tribon Data

Repair Tribon XML Dialog Box

Sets options for repairing Tribon data.

Files
Input XML file
Specify the import file.
Output XML file
Specify the output file. You can import this file into Smart 3D using the File > Import > Ship
Structure command.
Log File
Specify a log file that stores information about the repair process.

Panel
Curved Panels
Select this box to choose curved panels, which are panels defined on a sculpted, not flat,
surface.
Plane Panels
This option is not available in this release.
Select the curved panels to be modified in the xml
Click the panels to repair.

Options
Change instance property of panel to As Defined
Changes the instance property to AsDefined. This property specifies the position of objects
relative to their defining geometry. The different values for this property can be:
 AsDefined - The objects are located where they were defined.
 Reflected - If the objects were defined on the port side, they are actually on the
starboard side. If the objects were defined on the starboard side, they are actually on
the port side.
 Both - The objects are symmetrical with respect to the origin and are located on both
sides.
Move profile parts to other side of center line (Change Y value)
Reflects the profile parts about the Y-axis so the parts are in the correct location.
Move seams to other side of centerline (Change Y value)
Reflects the seams about the Y-axis so the parts are in the correct location.
The other options in this section are not available in this release of the software.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 286

Repairing Tribon Data

Options to process
OK
Processes the selected panel and closes the dialog. You need to navigate to the log file
location to review.
Cancel
Cancels the repair selection or closes the dialog.
Apply
Processes the selected panel without closing the dialog. You can then change the selection
to process another repair.
View Log
Opens the log file for selection and displays the results for Options selected. This option is
available only after using the Apply option.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 287

SECTION 24

Manufacturing Service Manager

Manufacturing Service Manager (in the Structural Manufacturing task) or Tools >
Manufacturing Service Manager reviews and updates manufacturing objects. Review displays
a report of the current condition of the manufacturing objects that you have selected. Updating
pulls any outstanding changes into the manufacturing environment. The command is available
on the vertical toolbar in Structural Manufacturing, and by clicking Tools > Manufacturing
Service Manager in Molded Forms, Structural Detailing, Planning, and Structural
Manufacturing.
You can select individual parts, assemblies, or blocks for this command.
The Manufacturing Service Manager pulls changes into the manufacturing environment
instead of associatively pushing from other tasks into the manufacturing environment. In this
way, the manufacturing environment is similar to the drawing environment; you have control
over which objects get updated and when.

 A manufacturing object goes on the To Do List for the following reasons:

 The object has a nonworking status, or it contains objects which are included in different
permission groups. You must change the manufacturing part status back to Working,
and then update the manufacturing part by using the Manufacturing Service Manager.
 The parent system of the manufacturing object was split in Molded Forms, and that split
migration produced an error.
 A compute found a failure within the rule and the manufacturing plate, manufacturing
profile, or manufacturing member returned a warning.
 Some other compute failure, with a specific action per entity, occurred.
 The same behavior occurs when the molded form split is performed by someone who does
not have write permissions to the manufacturing part. In this case, a person with write
permission to the manufacturing part must update the manufacturing part by the
Manufacturing Service Manager.

Manufacturing Service Manager Ribbon

Displays the controls used to update and review manufacturing objects.

Selection of Possible Report Data

Opens a dialog box from which you can set up reports.

Select
Selects objects in the model.
Finish
Starts the Manufacturing Service Manager.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 288

Manufacturing Service Manager

Attributes Tab
Option
Determines the manufacturing object type for which you are setting the review options.
Select the box next to the option, and change the setting to Show or Hide as necessary.

Settings Tab
Review Settings
Turn on the settings to apply when the Action is set to Review. The available options
include:
 Only include Out of Date manufacturing objects
 Only include manufacturing objects in To Do List
 Check detailed part in To Do List
 Include light parts
 Refresh after Update
 Highlight Out of Date objects
Update Settings
Turn on the settings to apply when the Action is set to Update. The available options
include:
 Delete objects under light part
 Update objects with detailed part in To Do List
 Update manufacturing objects in To Do List
 Recompute all manufacturing objects

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 292

SECTION 25

Copy by Family
The Edit > Copy by Family command replicates structural objects on the Select Copy Family
dialog box using three methods:
 Copy Similar replicates major portions of the model with the ability to automatically update
the replicas as changes are made. A copy similar family consists of groups of structure with
similar grid planes. One group is copied to the other groups. A typical example is to define a
transverse bulkhead, including profile stiffeners, seams, and openings, and copy the
bulkhead to other transverse locations.
 Copy Symmetry replicates portions of the model across a longitudinal centerline symmetry
grid plane. A copy symmetry family consists of groups of structure on both the port and
starboard sides of the symmetry plane. One group is reflected about the symmetry plane to
the other group.
 Copy Across Models replicates major portions of a model to another model.
Within the Create Target Group and Modify Target Group, you can manually select
objects to copy. For more information, see Manually copy objects (on page 308).

Copy by Family Batch Services

Smart 3D uses the SmartPlant Batch Services application to help you perform Copy by Family
functions in the background. You can submit the batch jobs that are executed in a batch queue.
For this, you must create, enable, and start batch queues before submitting the batch jobs.
For more information about SmartPlant Batch Services, see the Batch Services
User’s Guide and the Batch Services Quick Start Guide.
You can use the following guidelines listed to run the batch services:
 SmartPlant Batch Services must be installed on the client workstation that submits a batch
job and on the batch server workstation that processes the job. The necessary software
queues must also be created. For information on installing SmartPlant Batch Services and
setting up the batch queues, see Installing SmartPlant Batch Services in the Smart 3D
Installation Guide.
 The batch jobs that are submitted using this functionality can only be monitored by the
SmartPlant Batch Services application.
 Use the Intergraph Batch Manager tool provided by the Intergraph Batch Services to
discontinue any batch job. The Batch Timeout property specified on the Property page is
no longer valid.
 The mapped account that performs the batch job does not need to be an administrator on
the batch server.
 The batch processes run as a Windows service using a configured login. You do not need to
be logged on to the batch server.
 In the Intergraph Batch Server Properties (Local Computer) > Log On, make sure Allow
service to interact with desktop is selected.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 293

Copy by Family

 By default, .G 1 is the copy source group for the family (as indicated by the check in the
group heading). You can specify another group to be the copy source by selecting the
checkbox in that group's heading.
 All structural objects that are related to the plane in a group are included in the group after
Synchronize is performed. For more information, see Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on
page 322).
 You can select a group column heading box (for example, .G 1) and rename the group.

Create a copy similar family using multiple grid

planes
1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

2. Click Create New Similar Family in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Similar Family Properties dialog box displays.
3. Type a unique name for the family in the Name box.
4. Select the definition method for the family: Standard, By Range, or Overlapping.
5. Select the box in the grid under the .G1 group heading.
6. In the Workspace Explorer, select the first grid plane that defines the objects in .G1.
7. Select the box in the grid under the .G2 group heading.
8. In the Workspace Explorer, select the grid plane that defines the location of .G2.
9. Click Insert corresponding item (row).
10. Select the new (second) box in the grid under the .G1 group heading.
11. In the Workspace Explorer, select the second grid plane that defines the objects in .G1.
12. Select the new (second) box in the grid under the .G2 group heading.
13. In the Workspace Explorer, select the second grid plane that defines the location of .G2.
14. Optionally, click Insert group if you need more than two groups in the family.
15. Define the grid planes for any new groups as you did for .G2.
16. Define the Target Parent System for the target objects using Browse.
17. Specify whether to copy the manufacturing data using the Copy MfgData option.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 299

Copy by Family

18. Click OK.

 By default, .G1 is the copy source group for the family (as indicated by the check in the
group heading). You can specify another group to be the copy source by selecting the
checkbox in that group's heading.
 All structural objects that are related to both planes in a group are included in the group after
Synchronize is performed. For more information, see Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on
page 322).
 You can select a group column heading box (for example, .G1) and rename the group.

Modify a copy similar family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to modify under the Copy Similar Families hierarchy.
3. Click Edit Family Definition in the Select Copy Family dialog box. This activates the
Similar Family Properties dialog box.
4. Using the dialog box controls, edit the family as needed.

 The grid planes in a row cannot be modified. You can delete the group with grid planes to
change, and add a new group.
 An existing row cannot be deleted. You can delete the family in the Select Copy Family
dialog box and create a new one with the needed number of rows.

Delete a copy similar family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to delete under the Copy Similar Families hierarchy.
3. Click Delete Family Definition .

Create a copy symmetry family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

2. Click Create New Symmetry Family in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Symmetry Family Properties dialog box displays.
3. Type a unique name for the family in the Name box.
4. In the Workspace Explorer, select one or more coordinate systems to define the symmetry
plane.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 300

Copy by Family

The coordinate systems display in the Symmetry Planes box.

All selected coordinate systems must have coincident Y=0 planes.
5. In the Port Group Name box, type a name for the port side group.
6. In the Starboard Group Name box, type a name for the starboard side group.
7. Under Source Group, select whether the port side or the starboard side is the copy source
group.
8. Define the Target Parent System for the target objects using Browse.
9. Specify whether to copy the manufacturing data using the Copy MfgData option.
10. Specify whether to set the symmetry data using the Set Symmetry Property for Parts
option.
11. Click OK.

Modify a copy symmetry family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to modify under the Copy Symmetry Families hierarchy.
3. Click Edit Family Definition in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Symmetry Family Properties dialog box displays.
4. Using the dialog box controls, edit the family as needed.
An existing coordinate system in the Symmetry Planes box cannot be
deleted. You can delete the family in the Select Copy Family dialog box and create a new one
with the needed coordinate system.

Delete a copy symmetry family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to delete under the Copy Symmetry Families hierarchy.
3. Click Delete Family Definition .

Create a copy across models family using a single

grid plane
1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

2. Click Create New Across Model Family in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Across Model Family Definition dialog box displays.
3. Type a unique name for the family in the Name box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 301

Copy by Family

4. Type a value in the Range Growth Value box, or use the default value. The Method
definition is selected as Standard by default.
5. To change the Group Name, click the cell corresponding to the target group name, and type
the name.
6. To select the source ship, click the cell Ship Name of the source, and select the ship from
the list. To change the Group Name, click the cell corresponding to the source group name,
and type the name.
7. Click the cell Corresponding Elements1 under the Target or Source, and select the grid
plane that defines the target or source group.
8. Click OK.
All structural objects that are related to the plane in a group are included in the group
after Synchronize is performed. For more information, see Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on
page 322).

Create a copy across models family using multiple

grid planes
1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

2. Click Create New Across Model Family in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Across Model Family Definition dialog box displays.
3. Type a unique name for the family in the Name box.
4. Type a value in the Range Growth Value box, or use the available value. The Method
definition is selected as Standard by default.
5. To change the Group Name, click the cell corresponding to the target group name, and type
the name.
6. To select the source ship, click the cell Ship Name of the source, and select the ship from
the list. To change the Group Name, click the cell corresponding to the source Group
Name, and type the name.
7. Click the cell Corresponding Elements1 under the Target or Source, and define the grid
plane that defines the target/source group.
8. Click the Add Corresponding Elements button to add Corresponding Elements rows to
define additional grid planes for the target or source group.
9. Click OK.

Create a copy across models family by range

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

2. Click Create New Across Model Family in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Across Model Family Definition dialog box displays.
3. Type a unique name for the family in the Name box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 302

Copy by Family

4. Type a value in Range Growth Value box, or use the default value.
5. Select Method from the By Range list.
6. To change the Group Name, click the cell corresponding to the target group name, and type
the name.
7. To select the source ship, click the cell Ship Name of the source, and select the ship from
the list. To change the Group Name, click the cell corresponding to the source group name,
and type the name.
8. Click the cells Corresponding Elements1 and Corresponding Elements2 under the
Target or Source, and define the grid planes for the target or source group.
9. Click Add Corresponding Elements to add Corresponding Elements rows to define
additional grid planes for the target/source group. Because there are only two corresponding
elements allowed when the Method definition is By Range, the Add corresponding
Elements and Delete Corresponding Elements buttons are not available.
10. Click OK.

Modify a copy across model family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to modify under the Copy Across Model Families hierarchy.
3. Click Edit Family Definition in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Copy Across Model Family Properties dialog box displays.
4. Using the dialog box controls, edit the family definition as needed.

 You can edit the name of the family and the range growth value.
 Optionally, you can add additional Corresponding Elements rows to define additional
grid planes using Add Corresponding Elements.
5. Click Apply or OK to save the changes.

 You cannot change the Method definition.

 The target and source group details cannot be edited.
 For more information on configuration details, see Across Model Family Definition Dialog
Box (on page 319).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 303

Copy by Family

Delete a copy across model family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to delete under the Copy Across Model Families hierarchy.
3. Click Delete Family Definition .

Copy objects in a similar family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to work with under the Copy Similar Families hierarchy.
For instructions on creating a new copy similar family, see Create a copy similar
family using a single grid plane (on page 298) and Create a copy similar family using
multiple grid planes (on page 299).
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Filter box, select the filter that the copy uses to find structural objects. By
default, Workspace Filter is used.
The <Filter> + Workspace Filter option allows you to select a predefined filter from
the Select Filter dialog box so that the operation is performed on only those objects
satisfying both the predefined filter and the Workspace filter.
5. In the Source Group box, select the group from which to copy objects. By default, this is the
group indicated as the source group when you defined the family. For more information, see
Similar Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 314).
6. In the Target Group box, select the group to which to copy objects from the Source Group.
Optionally, select Multiple to copy to more than one target group.

7. Click Find and correlate objects .

The software highlights all existing structural objects that are similar and meet the criteria of
both the Source Group and the Target Group.

8. Click Create target group copy on the ribbon.

The software highlights in yellow all the objects in the Source Group that are not in the
Target Group.
9. Optionally, select any highlighted objects in the graphics view that you do not want to copy
to the Target Group.
The color of the highlighted objects changes from yellow to cyan.
10. Click Finish.
The software copies the highlighted objects in the Source group to the Target group.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 304

Copy by Family

Update objects in a similar family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to update under the Copy Similar Families hierarchy.
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Filter box, select the filter that the copy uses to find structural objects. By
default, Workspace Filter is used.
The <Filter> + Workspace Filter option allows you to select a predefined filter from
the Select Filter dialog box so that the operation is performed on only those objects
satisfying both the predefined filter and the Workspace filter.
5. In the Source Group box, select the group from which to copy objects. By default, this is the
group indicated as the source group during the original copy. For more information, see
Copy Objects in a Similar Family (on page 304).
6. In the Target Group box, select the group to which to copy objects from the Source Group.
Optionally, select Multiple to copy to more than one target group.

7. Click Find and correlate objects .

The software highlights all existing structural objects that are similar, meet the criteria of
both the Source Group and the Target Group, and have been added after the original
copy.

8. Click Modify target group copy on the ribbon.

The software highlights all the objects that are in the Source Group but not in the Target
Group, in both the Source Group and the Target Group but have changed, or have been
added after the original copy.
9. Optionally, select any highlighted objects in the graphics view that you do not want to copy
to the Target Group.
The color of the highlighted objects changes from yellow to green.
10. Click Finish.
The software copies the highlighted objects in the Source group to the Target group.
Within the Create Target Group and Modify Target Group, you can manually select
objects to copy. See Manually Copy Objects (on page 308).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 305

Copy by Family

Delete objects in a similar family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to work with under the Copy Similar Families hierarchy.
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Group box, select the group in which objects have been deleted. By default,
this is the group indicated as the source group during the original copy. For more
information, see Copy objects in a similar family (on page 304).
5. In the Target Group box, select the group in which to remove the deleted objects from the
Source Group. Optionally, select Multiple to copy to more than one target group.

6. Click Delete target group copy on the ribbon.

The software highlights all the objects in the Target Group that have been deleted from the
Source Group.
7. Optionally, select any highlighted objects in the Target group that you do not want deleted.
The color of the highlighted objects changes from yellow to green.
8. Click Finish.
The software deletes the highlighted objects in the Target group. Objects highlighted in
green are not deleted from the Target Group. The software marks the green objects as
recognized differences between the two groups and excludes the objects from future copy
operations.

Copy objects in a symmetry family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to work with under the Copy Symmetry Families hierarchy.
For instructions on creating a new copy symmetry family, see Create a copy
symmetry family (on page 300).
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Filter box, select the filter that the copy uses to find structural objects. By
default, Workspace Filter is used.
The <Filter> + Workspace Filter option allows you to select a predefined filter from
the Select Filter dialog box so that the operation is performed on only those objects
satisfying both the predefined filter and the Workspace filter.
5. In the Source Group box, select the group from which to copy objects. By default, this is the
group indicated as the source group when you defined the family. For more information, see
Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 317).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 306

Copy by Family

6. In the Target Group box, select the group to which to copy objects from the Source Group.

7. Click Find and correlate objects .

The software highlights all existing structural objects that have symmetry.

8. Click Create target group copy on the ribbon.

Update objects in a symmetry family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to update under the Copy Symmetry Families hierarchy.
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Filter box, select the filter that the copy uses to find structural objects. By
default, Workspace Filter is used.
The <Filter> + Workspace Filter option allows you to select a predefined filter from
the Select Filter dialog box so that the operation is performed on only those objects
satisfying both the predefined filter and the Workspace filter.
5. In the Source Group box, select the group from which to copy objects. By default, this is the
group indicated as the source group during the original copy. For more information, see
Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 317).
6. In the Target Group box, select the group to which to copy objects from the Source Group.

7. Click Find and correlate objects .

The software highlights all existing structural objects that are similar, meet the criteria of
both the Source Group and the Target Group, and have been added after the original
copy.

8. Click Modify target group copy on the ribbon.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 307

Copy by Family

10. Click Finish.

The software copies the highlighted objects in the Source group to the Target group.
Within the Create Target Group and Modify Target Group, you can manually select
objects to copy. See Manually copy objects (on page 308).

Delete objects in a symmetry family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to work with under the Copy Symmetry Families hierarchy.
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Group box, select the group in which objects have been deleted. By default,
this is the group indicated as the source group during the original copy. For more
information, see Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 317).
5. In the Target Group box, select the group in which to remove the deleted objects from the
Source Group.

6. Click Delete target group copy on the ribbon.

Manually copy objects

When using the Create target group copy and Modify target group copy commands
on the Copy by Family ribbon, you can manually select items to copy. Select from the following
two methods:

Copy Preselected Objects

1. Pre-select the needed objects.
2. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

3. To create a target, select Create target group copy , or click Finish.

Preselected objects are copied. Objects on which the selected objects are dependent are
also copied.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 308

Copy by Family

4. If you want to modify an existing target, select Modify target group copy , or click
Finish.
Preselected objects are copied. Objects on which the selected objects are dependent are
also copied.
Only the target group is modified, even if you select target and source objects.

Clear Objects and Select Again

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
2. Clear the Select All checkbox in the Synchronize Options dialog box, and select Create
target group copy .
All the copy candidates are highlighted in green, indicating that they are no longer selected.
3. Manually select the objects to copy.

Copy objects using Copy Shortcuts

You can replicate objects under similar or symmetry families and update the replicas using
customized shortcut keys.

Configure Copy Shortcuts

1. Define the shortcut keys in the [Link] file. The file is located in the
[Product Folder]\CopybyFamily\Data folder.
2. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
3. In the Select Copy Family dialog box, click Copy Shortcuts.
The Copy Shortcuts Settings dialog box displays.
4. Configure each shortcut key as follows:
a. In the Family cell, specify Similar or Symmetry.
b. In the Source Group cell, specify the family group to use as the copy source.
c. In the Target Group cell, specify the family group to create or modify.
d. In the Select Child cell, specify True to include child objects in the copy operation, or
False to exclude them. The default value comes from the Copy by Family ribbon.
e. In the Molded Form Only cell, specify True if the shortcut key is used only in the
Molded Forms task, or False if it is used across tasks. The default value comes from
the Copy by Family ribbon.
5. In Log File Path, specify a log file for storing the copy shortcuts operation.
6. Click OK.

Replicate Objects Using Shortcut Keys

1. In the Workspace Explorer, select the objects under the family range to be replicated or to
update their replicas.
2. Press the assigned copy shortcut key to start the copy shortcuts operation.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 309

Copy by Family

A dialog box displays showing the corresponding family name and stating that the copy or
modify operation is in progress. When the operation is completed, the dialog box closes
automatically.

 If any error occurs during the copy shortcuts operation, a dialog box displays allowing you to
display the log file.
 If there are any unresolved entities on the target side, the browser automatically displays
these entities so that you can resolve them manually.

Copy objects in an across model family

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Click Create New Across Model Family , and create a copy across model family. For
information on how to create a across model family, see Create a copy across models family
using a single grid plane (on page 301) and Create a copy across models family using
multiple grid planes (on page 302).

3. Select the Copy Across Model Family from the Copy Across Families hierarchy.
4. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.

5. Click Create target group copy .

6. Click Finish to copy the objects from the source ship to the target ship.

Find and correlate objects across models

1. In the target ship, click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

3. Select the Copy Across Model Family from the Copy Across Families hierarchy.
4. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.

5. Click Find and correlate .

The objects which can be mapped are identified.
6. Click Finish to correlate the objects to the target ship from the specified source ship.
After you perform Find and correlate, the software includes the objects to the
copy family so that duplicates are not created during the synchronize operation.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 310

Copy by Family

Select the source filter for copy across models

You can perform copy across models without selecting a filter (No Filter) or by specifying the
Source Filter.

Performing Copy Across Models without specifying a Source Filter

1. In the target ship, click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the Copy Across Model Family from the Copy Across Families hierarchy.
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Filter box, select the No Filter option.

5. Click Create target group copy .

The message As Source Filter is not specified, all the entities in Source Ship will be
processed. This could take considerable time. Please press OK to continue or Cancel
to stop the operation.
6. Click Yes to perform the copy or No to cancel the copy and specify a different filter.

Performing Copy Across Models specifying a Source Filter

1. In the target ship, click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the Copy Across Model Family from the Copy Across Families hierarchy.
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays. The Source Filter list shows your previously used
filters and the No Filter and Select Filter options. By default, your last used filter is
selected. If this is the first time you synchronize the family, No Filter is the default.
4. In the Source Filter box, select a filter. To select a filter corresponding to those in the
source model of the selected copy across model family, select Select Filter. Select a filter
from the Select Filter dialog box, and click OK.

 The Source Filter box does not allow you to type a filter name.
 You must create filters under Ship Filters to be seen from another model.

5. Click Create target group copy .

If the filter exists, the copy candidates are selected based on the objects associated with the
filter.
If the specified filter does not exist, the message Filter with the given name does
not exist in Source Ship. Please enter the name of an existing Filter displays. Select
Source Filter for Copy Across Models.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 311

Copy by Family

Schedule a Copy by Family operation as a batch job

1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.
2. Click Batch.
The Copy by Family Batch dialog box displays.
You must configure the batch queues before you can submit a Copy by Family
operation as a batch job. For more information, see Configure the Smart 3D batch queues
(on page 312).
3. Set up the parameters to meet your needs. For more information, see Copy By Family Batch
Dialog Box (on page 324).
4. Click Submit.
The Schedule [Task] dialog box displays.
5. Set up the scheduling parameters to meet your needs. For more information, see Schedule
[Task] Dialog Box (on page 325).

Configure the Smart 3D batch queues

1. Run the [Link] utility. By default, this utility is downloaded to the
[Product Folder]\ProjectMgmt\Tools\Bin folder.
The software creates, enables, and starts the SP3DProjectManagement, SP3DPrinting, and
SP3DApplication queues.

Configure account mapping for batch services

1. Click Start > Intergraph Batch Manager.
2. Click Server > Connect To to connect to individual servers.
3. Right-click a server, and select Account Mapping.
The Account Mapping dialog box displays.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 312

Copy by Family

4. Type the account mapping details. In the following example, all users and domains from
Map From Account are mapped to the Domain/Host: V91HFTSTBLP and User: dwguser
account.

5. Click Add.
6. Type the password to complete the mapping.
Other mapping options are also possible. For example, the jobs submitted by User-1
can be mapped to Account-1 while the jobs submitted by User-2 can be mapped to Account-2.

Synchronize Options Dialog Box

Find Options
Clear relationships for Source Filter before Find
Removes any relationships created in the family after clicking Find and correlate objects
. This restores highlighting of objects in the graphics view for the Find and correlate
objects step. Clear then Find performs the same function as Refresh Family on
the Select Copy Family dialog box.
This option removes all Copy By Family relationships in the current family
for the objects in the source filter.
To In/Outboard
Changes all port and starboard molded conventions to inboard and outboard before using
the Find and correlate objects command.
Manual Mode
Manually find objects that were not found by the software when using the Find and
correlate objects command. You can select an object for the Source Group and an
object for the Target Group to make them similar or symmetrical.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 313

Copy by Family

Create/Modify Options
Molded Forms objects only
Selects molded forms objects.
Select All
Selects all of the objects.
Select Child
Selects the child objects.

Modify Only Options

Geometry Modifications
Finds changes in landing curves.

Similar Family Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the groups and grid planes for a Copy Similar family.

Overview
The Copy Similar method uses a user-defined family of similar grid planes to define what
structural objects are copied and to maintain the relationships between the objects to check for
modifications. You define a family by selecting the grid planes for each group in the family.

In the following example, Group1 is the source group. The software finds all plate systems that
use the Group1 transverse grid plane as the surface definition. The software then finds all
children of the plate system (seams, stiffeners, openings, and features). Finally, the software

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 314

Copy by Family

finds all the objects that are bounded by either the select grid plane or the plate systems defined
by the grid plane and all their children.

F63 F83 F103 F123

F64 F84 F104 F124

Overlapping
Defines the Copy Similar Family by specifying a range of grid planes, but ignores structure
that overlaps from one group to the next. For example, in the both the Standard and By
Range examples, a transverse bulkhead could be at the end of the F60-F61 range, but
could also be at the beginning of the F61-F62 range. The Overlapping option prevents the
F61 bulkhead from being created twice.
By Range
Defines the Copy Similar Family by specifying a range of grid planes. All grid planes within a
range are included. In this example, the results are the same as the five rows specified for
the Standard example:

.G 1 .G 2 .G 3 .G 4

F60 F80 F100 F120

F64 F84 F104 F124

Range Growth Value

Type a value for the range required for selecting the Copy candidates.
.G X
Displays the groups that you have defined for this family. Check the corresponding box for

Creates, edits, deletes, and selects filters for use with the Define Workspace, Surface Style
Rules, and other Select by Filter commands, including Project Management's Model Data
Reuse (MDR), Drawings View Styles, and Reports commands that require runtime filter
selection. You can access this dialog box in several ways.
 Select File > Define Workspace, and select the More option in the Filter box.
 Select Format > Surface Style Rules, click New or Modify, and then select the More
option in the Filter box.
 Select Tools > Select by Filter.
The tree view displays the following types of filters:
 Catalog Filters - These filters are used to reference data in the Catalog. For example, a
catalog filter could apply to company-wide operations. Your administrator can define
Company_Filter_1, Company_Filter_2, and so forth.
 Model Filters - These filters are available to everyone assigned to a specific model
database. There are delivered catalog filters to query on the different types of model objects.
You must have the appropriate privileges to create, edit, or delete these filters.
 My Filters - These are personal filters that you create and place in the My Filters folder.
They are visible only to you, the owner. You cannot see the personal filters of others, and

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 320

Copy by Family

they cannot see your personal filters. Select a filter from one of the listed filters, or create a
new filter to meet your specific requirements.
New Folder
Creates a new folder.
New Filter (Simple or Asking)
Displays the New Filter Properties dialog box so that you can create a new filter. Asking
filters allow you to specify the parameters of the search. An asking filter has built-in
functionality to ask for values (with boxes that you are required to supply). The values apply
to properties that you have already designated you will supply when the filter runs. Asking
filters are portable between models.
Model Data Reuse (MDR) does not support asking filters. The only valid filter
types for an MDR transaction are System, Permission Group, Object Type, Volume and
Properties. You can define the filter on any one of these tabs or in a combination using
multiple tabs.

New Compound Filter

Displays the New Compound Filter Properties dialog box, which you use to create a new
compound filter containing the Or, And, or Not operators. Compound filters are not
supported for MDR.
New SQL Filter
Displays the New SQL Filter Properties dialog box, in which you can type the text of an
SQL query. SQL filters are not supported for MDR
Delete
Removes a filter or folder from the Select Filter list. If you delete a folder, the software also
deletes its contents.
Rename
Changes the name of an existing filter or folder from the Select Filter list.
Properties
Displays the Filter Properties dialog box so that you can select the properties that
determine your filter search criteria.

 If this dialog box is activated from the Select by Filter command, you can select multiple
filters on this dialog box. Hold CTRL or SHIFT, and click each filter. When you click OK, all
objects that fit the selected filters are selected.
 If this dialog box is activated from the Select by Filter command, it clears the select set
before adding objects to the select set.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 321

Copy by Family

Select Copy Family Dialog Box

Toolbar
Create New Similar Family
Creates a new copy similar family. For more information on creating copy similar families,
see Similar Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 314).

Create New Symmetry Family

Creates a new symmetry family. For more information on creating copy symmetry families,
see Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 317).

Create New Across Model Family

Copy Family Hierarchy

Copy Across Model Families
Lists the Copy Across Model Families that you have defined.

Copy Similar Families

Lists the copy similar families that you have defined.

Copy Symmetry Families

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 322

Copy by Family

Lists the copy symmetry families that you have defined.

Batch
Displays the Copy by Family Batch dialog box. You can use this dialog box to execute jobs
in a batch queue. For more information, see Copy By Family Batch Dialog Box (on page
324).
Synchronize
Opens the Copy by Family ribbon for the selected family.
Close
Closes the dialog box.

Copy Shortcuts Settings Dialog Box

Configures shortcut keys for similar or symmetry families, and specifies a log file for the copy
shortcuts operation.
SNo
Displays the number assigned to the shortcut key.
ShortCut Key
Displays the shortcut key defined in the [Link] file. This text file is
located in the [Product Folder]\CopybyFamily\Data folder.
Family
Indicates whether to copy similar families or symmetry families.
Source Group
Specifies the family group to use as the copy source.
Target Group
Specifies the family group to create or modify.
Select Child
Determines whether to include child objects in the copy operation. Specify True or False for
the value. The default value comes from the Copy by Family ribbon.
Molded Form Only
Determines whether the shortcut key applies only in the Molded Forms task. Specify True
or False for the value. The default value comes from the Copy by Family ribbon.
Log File Path
Specifies a log file for storing the last copy shortcuts operation.
Browse
Click to browse to the log file.
Open
Opens the log file.
OK

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 323

Copy by Family

Logs are generated for Find and correlate objects , Create target group copy , Modify
target group copy , and Finish operations.

Find and correlate objects log

The purpose of this log is to show objects that failed to find operations because the target area
contains duplicated objects (both geometrically and topologically). You must delete one of the
duplicates before the Find and correlate objects command can correlate the source and target
objects and any dependent objects.
If the Modify Port/Starboard option is selected, the list of forced objects is logged at
the finish of the Find and correlate objects command.

Create target group copy log

The initial step of this command shows the candidates for copy (that is, objects that do not yet
have a target object). Any objects that are on the to-do list are not selected for copy. None of the
dependents of the to-do list objects are selected for copy.
The list of objects on the to-do list is logged, and any dependent objects are listed at the end.

Modify target group copy log

Modify target group copy excludes to-do list objects and reports on them in the same way as
the Create target group copy command does. Modify target group copy compares the
attributes of the source object with the target object and selects candidates to copy when
differences are found. To simplify the selection process, these differences are reported in the
log.
The actual attribute difference is shown first with the objects that are different shown at the end.
Because features are considered attributes of parts, this creates a hierarchy. All features,
including intermediate features, are shown.

Finish after Create, Modify, or Delete log

Errors in the finish log include:
 New errors, such as targets that go on the to-do list
 Exceptions thrown by the underlying operations such as copy, split, or detail.
 Exceptions thrown by Copy by Family because it is processing an object before its parent.
This requires that the copy be run a second time.
The format of these error messages is as follows:

If the target geometry is bad, the dependents are copied unless they cannot be copied without
the parent. The dependents that are not copied are listed at the end of the log.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 327

Copy by Family

See Also
Copy by Family (on page 293)
Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on page 322)
Copy By Family Log File Workflows (on page 328)
Similar Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 314)
Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 317)

Copy By Family Log File Workflows

Target is on the To-Do List
If the "!Molded Form target object in error A-614DCK->A- 2602DCK/Plate" type of error is
the first error in the log file, check the unsupported object construction list.
 If the source object's construction is not supported by copy, try to fix the target object
manually or recreate it manually on the target side.
 If the source object's construction is supported by copy, select the Clear Before check box,
run Find and correlate objects, and try copying again.
After the target object is repaired or created, select the Clear Before check box, run Find and
correlate objects and Create/Modify/Delete again to copy any remaining objects.
If the "!Split or Part target object in error A- 614DCK_PART->A-2602DCK_PART/Part" type
of error is the first error in the log file, check the unsupported object construction list.
 If the source object's construction is not supported by copy, try to fix the target object
manually by deleting detailing and redetailing the parts or by fixing the molded forms system
and boundaries. Alternately, you can recreate the object manually on the target side.
 If the source object is supported by copy, contact Intergraph Support, and model the failed
target object manually.
After the target object is repaired or created, select the Clear Before check box, run Find and
correlate objects and Create/Modify/Delete again to copy any remaining objects.

Exception
If the “!!!Exception processing above elements” type of error is the first error in the log file,
do the following:
 If the failed object is a Molded Forms object, select the Clear Before checkbox, run Find
and correlate objects again, and then try copying again.
 If the failed object is a detailed part, or if the second try to copy is unsuccessful, contact
Intergraph Support, and model the failed target object manually. After the object is repaired
or created, run Find and correlate objects and Create/Modify/Delete again to copy any
remaining objects.

Object Skipped
If the "!Skipped D51(2nd Dk)-491DCK/Plate" type of error is found in the log file, then there
was a problem with the order in which the objects were copied. If you run copy again, the
objects are copied correctly, and errors are eliminated from the log.
If errors remain, then there was a problem with the parent of the failed object specified in the
skipped error log. Fix the parent so that this object can be copied successfully.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 328

Copy by Family

Entities not Completely Supported by the Copy Process

Limitations of the copy implementation can be classified in the following types:
 Object types not yet supported by copy similar/symmetry. The objects are excluded from the
copy process. That is, they are not selected as candidates. In some cases, dependent
entities might be selected for copy and could fail to copy. These specific cases are listed
below.
 Some aspect of the construction of the object is not supported. In this case, you must edit
the object to remove the unsupported aspect. These specific constructions are listed below.

Object Types Not Supported By Copy Similar/Symmetry

 Auxiliary coordinate systems. Dependent objects fail.
 Inverted connections.
 Beam parts (detailed property and beams using assoc points on edges).
 Profile Edge Reinforcement Parts.
 Straking Seams.
 Profile Straking Seams.
 Split Physical Connections.
 Manufacturing Plates and Profiles.

Aspects of the Construction of Object Not Supported

 Problem with profile and seams by table.
 RAD Sketches containing constraints. After copy, the software replaces the inputs to the
sketcher with the new copied geometry. If the new geometry is not infinite, and if the
direction of the curves is reversed, this produces bad results for end point constraints and
any constraints dependent on the direction. Copy Symmetry with edge constraints is not
supported.
 Assoc point on edge. Using the place point on edge Smart Point placement can result in
the point reversal during mirror.
See Also
Copy By Family Log Files (on page 327)

Frame mapping and Range Growth Values in Copy by

Family
The Range Growth Value and Offset values determine the range of the family from which you
must pick the copy candidates. The technique for using Range Growth Value depends on the
type of family with which you are working.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 329

Copy by Family

Similar Standard Family

If you create a similar standard family with F1 as the source and F4 as the target, the software
maps F1 to F4.

If you specify a default Range Growth Value of 0.8, then the range of the family extends from
the source frame -0.8 to the source frame + 0.8

Similar Overlapping Family

To create a similar overlapping family you must have at least one frame in common between the
source and the target. For example, you could create a family with F1 and F3 as the source and
F3 and F5 as the target. In this case, F3 is the common frame. The software then maps F1 to
F3, F2 to F4, and F3 to F5.

If you specify a default Range Growth Value of 0.8, Smart 3D sets the range of the family from
the minimum source frame value - 0.8 to the maximum source frame value + 0.8

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 330

Copy by Family

Symmetry Family
If you create symmetry with port as the source with five positive frames and starboard as the
target with five negative frames, Smart 3D maps L-1 to L1, L2 to L-2, L -3 to L3, L-4 to L4, and
L-5 to L5.

If you specify a default Range Growth Value of 0.8, Smart 3D sets the range of the symmetry
family from the centerline + 0.8 to infinity.

Across Models Standard Family

If you create an Across-Models Standard Family with F1 as the source and F4 as the target,
Smart 3D maps F1 to F4. This behavior is the same as creating a standard family within a
model. The software also maps the X and Y axes in an Across Models Family. If you specify a
default Range Growth Value of 0.8, Smart 3D sets the range of the family from the source
minimum frame value - 0.8 to the source maximum frame value + 0.8.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 331

Copy by Family

Objects and behaviors supported for Copy by Family

Objects supported for copy in Copy by Family
Task Objects Supported for Copy Similar Symmetry Copy Across
in Copy by Family Family Family Model Family

Molded Forms Planar Plate Yes Yes Yes

 Using plane created by Plane by
Vector Normal
 Using plane created by Plane By
Point Normal
 Using plane created by Plane By
3 Points

LEP Yes Yes Yes

NLEP Yes Yes Yes

Advanced Plate System Yes Yes Yes

 APS polyline plate macros
 APS corrugated plate macros
 APS swage plate macros

Bracket by Plane Yes Yes Yes

 Using plane created by coincident
plane
 Using plane created by Plane By
Vector Normal
 Using plane created by Plane By
3 Points

Bracket by selected supports Yes Yes Yes

Copy by Family also

supports brackets created with
Tripping Bracket.

Profile by intersection Yes Yes Yes

Profile by projection Yes Yes Yes

Profile by geometric construction Yes Yes Yes

Profile by offset Yes Yes Yes

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 332

Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported for Copy Similar Symmetry Copy Across

in Copy by Family Family Family Model Family

Profile by table Yes Yes Yes

Tripping stiffener Yes Yes Yes

Profile edge reinforcement Yes Yes Yes

Seam by intersection Yes Yes Yes

Seam by offset Yes Yes Yes

Seam by table Yes Yes Yes

Seam by geometric construction Yes Yes Yes

Profile seam Yes Yes Yes

Openings Yes Yes Yes

Macro or Catalog openings Yes Yes Yes

Standard Members Yes Yes Yes

Built-up (Designed) Members Yes Yes Yes

Generated logical connections Yes Yes Yes

Split logical connection having Yes Yes Yes

inverted regions

Manual logical connection Yes Yes Yes

Plate knuckles Yes Yes Yes

Profile knuckles Yes Yes Yes

Topological points Yes Yes Yes

Structural Standalone plate part Yes Yes No

Detailing
Lapped plate part Yes Yes No

Bracket part Yes Yes No

Standalone Profile part Yes Yes No

Edge features Yes Yes No

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 333

Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported for Copy Similar Symmetry Copy Across

in Copy by Family Family Family Model Family

Corner features Yes Yes No

Sketch features Yes Yes No

Edge treatments Yes Yes No

Manual chamfer under edge Yes Yes No

reinforcement

Generated chamfer Yes Yes No

Smart plate Yes Yes No

Assembly connections Yes Yes No

Physical connections Yes Yes No

End cuts Yes Yes No

Objects not supported by Copy by Family

Task Objects Not Supported by Copy by Family

Molded Forms Objects created using Reference Curve by Intersection

Ruled plates

Child plates

Structural Detailing Beam profile part

Plate edge reinforcement part

Profile edge reinforcement part

Profile straking seam

Split physical connection

Member generic assembly connection

Manual physical connection

Structural Template
Manufacturing
Pin Jig

Manufacturing Plate

Manufacturing Profile

No other objects from other tasks (such as Equipment, Hangers and Supports,
and so on) are supported in Copy by Family.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 336

Copy by Family

Objects and behaviors supported in Attribute Modify

Properties supported for modified objects in Copy by Family
Task Objects Supported Properties Supported
for Modify in
Copy by Family

for Modify in
Copy by Family

Seam  Seam type

 All user-defined attributes

Profile Seam  All user-defined attributes

Opening  Opening Design Type

 Opening Planning Method
 Opening Production Method
 All user-defined attributes

Manual/Generated Only user-defined attributes

Logical Connections

Standard Member  Type

 Type Category
 Priority
 Continuity Type
 Continuity Priority number
 Align

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 340

Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported Properties Supported

for Modify in
Copy by Family

Member Part  Type

 Type Category
 Section Name
 Cardinal Point
 Angle
 Reflect
 End Releases
 Member Section Name
 Material
 Grade

Split Connection  Offset

 Offset Reference
 Distance
 Location Definition

SPS Opening  Cutting Limit

 All user-defined attributes

Frame Connection  Connection

 All user-defined attributes

Built-up Member  Type

 Type Category
 Priority
 Continuity Type
 Continuity Priority number
 Align

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 341

Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported Properties Supported

for Modify in
Copy by Family

Designed Member  Cardinal Point

 Angle
 Reflect
 Type Category
 Type
 Priority
 Length Extension
 Wide Extension - Top Flange
 Depth Extension

Structural Plate Part  Description

Detailing  Thickening Technique Requested
 All user-defined attributes

Bracket Part  Description

 Thickening Technique Requested
 All user-defined attributes

Profile Part  Naming Category

 Description
 All user-defined attributes

Edge Feature Not Supported

Corner Feature Not Supported

Sketch Feature Not Supported

Edge Treatment Not Supported

Standalone Plate Part Not Supported

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 342

Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported Properties Supported

for Modify in
Copy by Family

Assembly Connections  End Cut Type

 Split End To End Case
 Flip End To End Angle
 Chamfer Type
 Current Selection
 Question Controls
 All user-defined attributes

Physical Connections All attributes are supported

Free End Cuts  End Cut Type

 Chamfer Type
 Current Selection
 Question Controls
 Is Named By Rule

Webcut All attributes are supported

Flangecut All attributes are supported

To clear all the objects so that you can pick the objects to copy, clear Select All. The
objects then display in cyan. As you select the objects to copy, they display in yellow.
To select all the child objects when you select the parent, click Select Child.
Q: Are some objects not supported by the audit tool?
A: The audit tool does not report logical connections created by manually created features
copied using Copy by Family.
Q: Does Copy by Family support all kinds of filters?
A: The command supports ship filters, SQL filters, and user filters. Copy by Family does
not currently support asking filters.
Q: Which kind of coordinate systems can I use to create a symmetry family?
A: Currently, Smart 3D only supports ship coordinate systems for creating a symmetry
family.
Q: What should I do if I get an HRESULT failure?
A: HRESULT failures can occur because of compilation or build issues. Try to minimize the
test case by reducing the number of objects to determine the object that is causing the
HRESULT failure. Then, file an SR with the simplified workflow.
Q: What should I do if I see an Out of memory issue during the copy process?
A: Use the 3GB option and GC Cache to copy the objects from the source to the target. File
an SR so that the memory issues are resolved.
Q: What is the difference between Manual Mode in Find and Manual Find in the browser?
A: Smart 3D uses both options to map source to target objects. In Manual Mode, you can
resolve one object at a time. You can use Manual Find to resolve multiple objects at a time.
Q: What is the custom filter option in Copy by Family?
A: You can select either a workspace filter or any specific filter for performing the following
actions:
 Find/Create/Modify/Delete option in Copy by Family.
 Select objects for processing that are common to the workspace by using the Custom
Filter option.
Q: What issues do I face when I use coordinate systems with different frame spacing in Across
Models Family?
A: Issue 1 - If you create objects using one coordinate system but create the family using
another coordinate system, Smart 3D creates substitute planes at an improper location,
because the frame spacing is different for both of the coordinate systems. Because of this,
use the same coordinate system for both the family and the objects.
Issue 2 - If you create the hull and range family with coordinate systems having different
frame spacing, hull mapping fails. This also causes all of the dependents of the hull to fail to
copy.
Q: Does Copy by Family support modification (Property or Geometry)?
A: Yes, you can propagate feature modification to the target by using the Copy by Family
modify operation. You can achieve this by updating the feature count on the source by
adding or removing features on the source. Copy by Family picks up this feature count as a

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 346

Copy by Family

difference and deletes and recopies all of the features to the target. The Geometry
Modification must be checked on the Properties page.
Q: What kind of advanced plate system (APS) plates are supported using Copy by Family?
A: Copy by Family supports the following advanced plate systems:
 Plate systems created using APS polyline plate macros
 Plate system created using APS corrugated plate macros
 Plate system created using APS swage plate macros
Q. What is the System Hierarchy option in Copy by Family?
A. Copy by Family provides target parent system options on the Select Copy Family
dialog box so that the target objects are copied under the given parent system. This makes
target objects easier to locate.
Q: What is Copy/Paste? How can I use this command in conjunction with Copy by Family?
A: Copy/Paste lets you copy and paste objects from the source to the target by changing
inputs from the Paste dialog box.
If an object fails to copy from the source to the target using Copy by Family, then all the
dependent objects also fail to copy because the parent is missing on the target. Use
Copy/Paste to copy such objects, and perform an auto or manual Find to map the source to
the target object. Then, use Copy by Family to copy the dependent objects.
Q: What should I do to decide if a problem is related to Copy by Family?
A: Perform the following actions:
a. Verify that the object is supported by Copy by Family. For more information, see
Objects and behaviors supported for Copy by Family (on page 332).
b. If the object is supported, check for a ToDo list entry.
c. Try to Edit the object.
d. Try to Copy/Paste the object.
e. Try Model Data Reuse for the object.
If all the previous actions are successful, then the issue is related to Copy by Family.
Q: What is the port mapping issue in Copy by Family?
A: If the following message displays in the finish log, then this is a port mapping issue in
Copy by Family.
WARNING : Cannot resolve input mapping for object->
IJPortSrc-SF_!BLFX_0_0_8_<>_{}_()||D3-DCK
!Skipped F 70.000 m-1TBH-1/Plate
!Please review with support
Possible reasons:
 Smart 3D did not copy an object that the port needs.
 An ordering issue from Copy by Family exists.
 A port mapping issue from Copy by Family exists.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 347

Copy by Family

Use Copy/Paste to copy the object, and then use Auto or Manual Find to map the objects
using Copy by Family.
Q: What are the implications of using Commit in rules?
A: Avoid using Commit and client-tier references in rules. Using these references can
cause Smart 3D to exit.
Q: Can I use Copy by Family to convert a candidate to a crossover, or convert a crossover to a
candidate?
A: Copy by Family does not convert a crossover to a candidate or a candidate to a
crossover. We recommend that you do not perform such workflows, as the conversion might
result in Copy by Family data model corruption.
Q: When I change a leaf system, which objects are highlighted for modification?
A: Copy by Family does not support leaf system selection or deselection. When you modify
a leaf system, the software reports all the changes in a log file. On Finish, the target leaf
system inherits the changes.
Q: Does Copy by Family support inverted logical connections split by topological points?
A: Yes. Copy by Family retains logical connections with an inverted region when you split
by topological points.
Q: Does Copy by Family support profile region modifications?
A: Yes. Copy by Family can propagate profile region boundary modifications to a target
structure using copy similar and copy symmetry families.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 348

SECTION 26

Copy By Family Synchronize

The Edit > Copy by Family Synchronize command opens the Copy by Family ribbon with the
last used family set as the default family.
This command can be used if you want to perform Copy by Family for families that
already have been created. If no families exist, a message is displayed informing you that there
are "No Copy Families Defined".
See Also
Copy By Family Log Files (on page 327)
Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on page 322)
Similar Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 314)
Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 317)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 349

SECTION 27

Copy By Family Audit Report

The Tools > Copy by Family Audit Report command allows you verify that the source has
been copied to the target by highlighting selected source and targets after a copy has been
performed.

Copy By Family Audit Report Ribbon

Edit file report properties
Opens the Settings dialog box in which you set the path to the location where you want to
save the generated report. By default, the path for all the reports is set to C:\Documents and
Settings\[User name]\Smartmarine3d\Report Output.
Currently, three kinds of reports are generated. These reports are generated in
the Microsoft Excel workbook format and can be saved for future reference.
 Object Summary Report - Provides information on object details.
 Property Summary Report - Verifies that the properties of source and target objects
match.
 Property Compare Report - Provides a detailed description of the Property Summary
Report.

Select Objects
Select objects manually from Workspace Explorer or from the graphic view when Select
Mode list is set to Manual.

Run Report
Allows you process all the objects and displays the report. The Run Report option is not
available if it is Manual unless an object is selected manually.
Finish
Closes the reports. This option is only available after you run a report.
Reject
Rejects all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Report
Select Object Summary Report or Property Summary Report. The Object Summary
Report is available by default.
Select Mode
Lists the following modes:
 Manual - Selects objects manually from the Workspace Explorer or graphic view.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 350

Copy By Family Audit Report

 Auto Select Family Objects - Selects all objects associated with the selected family for
processing.
 Auto Select Family Objects in Workspace - Selects all objects associated with the
selected family which are in current workspace.
 Open Existing Report - Displays existing reports.
 Manual (recursive) - This is same as Manual mode except that in this case, when an
object is selected, its children also get selected.
Copy Family
Select the family on which you want to run the report. Acceptable values are Copy Across
Models Family, Similar Family, or Symmetry Family.

Object Summary Report

The Object Summary Report has three worksheets.
 Worksheets with object information. These worksheets are named in the following format -
“Source group-Target group”.
 Configuration worksheet
 Defective Entities worksheet
The report has multiple worksheets for multiple targets.

Worksheet with Object Information

In the worksheet with object information, you can find the following information:
Status
Displays the status of the object. If the object is copied, the status is OK. If the object is not
copied, the status is Check.
When the status is Check, you need to check for any discrepancies in the source
and the target. The entire row is highlighted in yellow. The parameters which fail to match
are highlighted in red.
Object Type
Displays information on the type of object.
Source Object Name
Displays the name of the source object.
TDL
Indicates whether this object (Source or Target) is present in the To Do List.
LC's
Displays the count of logical connections.
AC's
Displays the count of assembly connections.
PC's
Displays the count of physical connections.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 351

Copy By Family Audit Report

Fetr's
Displays the number of features available for the object.
Detailed
Displays a detailed status on the object.
Copied
Specifies whether the object has been copied successfully.
Target Object Name
Displays the name of the target object.

Configuration Worksheet
The Configuration sheet provides you with the following information:
Generation Date
Displays the date when the report was generated.
UserID
Displays user identification information.
Selected Mode
Specifies the mode selected.
Compute Time
Displays the time taken (in seconds) for generating the report.
Number of Objects
Displays the number of objects selected.

Defective Entities Worksheet

If there is any information about defective entities, it displays on the Defective Entities sheet.
When a cell in any row is selected in the report, the corresponding source and target
objects are highlighted in the graphic view.
You can also run the Object Summary Report on a Copy Across Model family.

Property Summary Report

The Property Summary Report has two work sheets - Parameter Summary and Defective
Entities.
In the Parameter Summary sheet, you can find the following information:
Status
Displays the status on the properties of the source and target objects. If all the properties for
the source and target match, the status is Ok. If any of the properties do not match, the
status is Check.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 352

Copy By Family Audit Report

If the status is Check, the entire row is highlighted in yellow. For multiple targets,
the status is Check if the properties of the source object fail to match with any of the targets.
In this case, the cell corresponding to that target is highlighted in red.
Object Type
Displays information on the type of object selected.
Source
Displays the name of the source object.
Show Details
Describes the Property Summary Report in detail.
Target
Displays the name of the target object.
In all the reports, any discrepancies in source and target are highlighted in red.

Property Compare Report

The Property sheet lists all of the properties of the source and targets and their status. In the
Property sheet, you can find the following information:
Status
Displays the status for each of the properties of the source and target objects.

 If the status is Check, it indicates that the property of the source and target has failed to
match. The entire row is highlighted in yellow. If the property matches, the status is Ok.
 When the status is Check, a comment is displayed on the target box (when you move
the pointer over the target box) indicating the expected value that is needed for the
properties to match.
 When the target value is expected to be different (in cases, when target attribute value
is defined by a rule), the status is Ok.
Property
Displays information on any property associated with the selected objects.
Source
Displays the name of the source object.
Target
Displays the name of the target object.
If the objects being processed for a particular report do not belong to the selected
family, then the following message displays: There are some objects not associated with the
family. Hence these objects will not be reported in the Report.

What do you want to do?

 Generate an object summary report in manual mode (on page 354)
 Generate an object summary report in auto select family objects mode (on page 354)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 353

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 356

SECTION 28

Place Assembly Connection

Places an assembly connection or free end cut at the selected frame connection. Assembly
connections define the necessary trimming between member parts and provide for the
generation of parts such as base plates, gusset plates, and clip angles. Assembly connections
also control cutbacks, copes, notches, bolt holes, weld preparations, and slots.

This command places member assembly connections or a free end cut on the member. The
software automatically places slab assembly connections when you place the slab.

Member Assembly Connections

Member assembly connections are similar to frame connections, but define the necessary
trimming between member parts and the generation of parts such as base plates, gusset plates,
and clip angles. Assembly connections control member features including cutbacks, copes,
notches, bolt holes, and slots. Whether or not features are placed depends on the member
assembly connection type and the geometry of the connection between the members.
There are several basic assembly connections delivered with the software. You can create your
own assembly connections by editing the [Link] workbook, and
then bulk loading the workbook. For more information on creating your own assembly
connections, see the Structure Reference Data Guide.
For very complex nodal connections, instead of writing a custom assembly
connection, you might want to try Trim Members in the Structure task.
The following general assembly connections are delivered with the software:

The base plate assembly connection places a plate at the end of

an unsupported member. This assembly connection requires an
unsupported frame connection on one member. For example, use
this assembly connection to place a base plate at the bottom of a
column.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 357

Place Assembly Connection

The corner gusset plate assembly connection connects a vertical

brace to a beam and column intersection using a gusset plate.
This assembly connection requires a frame connection with three
members, such as vertical corner brace.

The fitted assembly connection connects two members. This

assembly connection requires a frame connection with two
members, such as axis, seated, or flush. Examples of this
connection include a beam framing into a column or a beam
framing into another beam.

The gusset plate assembly connection connects a vertical or

horizontal brace to a beam or a vertical brace to a column using a
gusset plate. This assembly connection requires a frame
connection with two members, such as axis.

The miter assembly connection connects two members that meet

at an angle but are co-planar. This assembly connection requires
a frame connection with two members, such as axis. In addition,
the members must be end connected, have the same cross-
section, and have the same type category (both are beams for
example).

The splice assembly connection connects two members that are

collinear and end connected. This assembly connection requires
a frame connection with two members, such as axis.

The general surface assembly connection connects a member

end with a nonmember surface such as a slab, a deck, or a hull
plate. The member is cut to surface and a base plate is placed on
the member end.

End Cut Assembly Connections

The following end cut assembly connections are delivered with the software:

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 358

Place Assembly Connection

The end cut along assembly connection cuts the end of one
member to the sides or bottom of another member along the
second member's length.

The end cut bearing plate assembly connection connects the end
of a member along the axis of another member. This is typically
used to attach the end of a member to the flange of the
supporting member. The bearing plate connection works at any
angle and provides circular, rectangular, and triangular bearing
plates depending on the supported member's shape.

The end cut miter assembly connection connects two members

that meet at an angle but are co-planar. This assembly
connection required a frame connection with two members, such
as axis. In addition, the members must be end connected.

The end cut split assembly connection connects two members

that are collinear and end connected. This assembly connection
requires a frame connection with two members, such as axis.

The end cut split long box assembly connection is used when the
supported and supporting members are perpendicular to each
other. The supporting member is cut square to the supported
member while an item from the Axis category is placed on the
supported member.

The end cut split seam angle assembly connection is used when
the supported and supporting members are:
 member axes are collinear to each other
 have identical cross-section type and size
 have identical cardinal point and rotation values

The end cut split short box assembly connection is used when
the supported and supporting members are perpendicular to each
other. The supported member is cut square to the supporting
member while an item from the Axis category is placed on the
supporting member.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 359

Place Assembly Connection

End Cut Assembly Naming Conventions

Each end cut assembly connection name consists of three parts:
[EndCutCase]_[WebCutType]_[FlangeCutType]
where:
 [EndCutCase]
 Axis - Supported member is bounded by the axis curve of the supporting member
 LongBox - End-to-end perpendicular supported member is extended, and an axis end
cut is applied to the supporting member
 ShortBox - End-to-end perpendicular supporting member is extended, and an axis end
cut is applied to the supported member
 Miter - End-to-end non-collinear
 Split - End-to-end collinear
 SeamAngle - End-to-end collinear where one end is extended
 [WebCutType]
The WebCutType is used to type of web cut that is to be applied at the top of the web and at
the bottom of the web. The following combinations are available (W indicates a straight cut,
C indicates a Cope cut, and S indicates a Snipe cut):
 W#W#
 W#C#
 W#S#
 C#C#
 C#S#
 C#W#
 S#S#
 S#C#
 S#W#
 [FlangeCutType]
The FlangeCutType is used to type of flange cut that is to be applied at the left flange
section and at the right flange section. The following combinations are available (W
indicates a straight cut, C indicates a cope cut, and S indicates a snipe cut):
 W#W#
 W#S#
 S#S#
 S#W#
You cannot apply different flange cuts when the supported member has both a top flange and a
bottom flange. In these cases, the same flange cut type is applied to both the top and bottom
flange.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 360

Place Assembly Connection

You cannot apply different web cuts or flange cuts in the end-to-end cases. The end-to-end
cases place a web cut and flange cut on both the supported member and the supporting
member. For these cases, the same web cut and flange cut are applied to both the supported
member and the supporting member.

1 - Top left flange

2 - Top right flange
3 - Web top
4 - Web bottom
5 - Bottom right flange
6 - Bottom left flange

See Members for important related information.

Locating Assembly Connections

Assembly connections do not display in the model. However, if you set the Locate Filter to
Member Assembly Connections in the Structure task, you can locate and select assembly
connections for review and editing. Assembly connections are located at the ends of member
parts and appear as circles when you move the cursor over them. Any assembly components,
such as gusset plates, associated with the assembly connection also highlight.

When you select an assembly connection, the software displays the assembly connection type
in the ribbon. Select the Edit > Properties command to edit the assembly connection
properties. You cannot measure distances using the assembly connection graphic as an end
point when using the Tools > Measure command.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 361

Place Assembly Connection

Place Assembly Connection Ribbon

Specifies the properties for the assembly connection that you are placing or editing.
Assembly Connection Properties
Activates the Assembly Connection Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to
specify additional properties that you cannot set on the ribbon. For more information, see
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (see "Assembly Connection Properties Dialog
Box (Members)" on page 367).

Select Member/Connection
Activated automatically by the software so that you can select the frame connection or the
member for which you want to place assembly connections.
Finish
Click to place the assembly connection the model.
Cancel
Rejects the selected object.
Accept
Confirms that the selected members, is the member to place assembly connections for. The
software displays in tentative mode the results of the assembly connection.
Condition
Specifies how you want the software to handle existing assembly connections when you try
to place a new assembly connection at the same location. Select Retain existing to keep
the existing assembly connection. Select Update existing to replace the existing assembly
connection with the new assembly connection.
By Rule
Select to allow the software to select the assembly connection to use based on the selected
member parts and their orientation to each other.
Type
Select the assembly connection type to use. If you select By Rule, the software determines
the correct assembly connection to use based on the geometry between the member parts,
and this option is unavailable. If you select More, all available assembly connections display
from which you can select the assembly connection to use. For more information about
assembly connections, see Member Assembly Connections.
Member Part Parent
Select to make the member part the parent object of the assembly connection. Clear this
option to specify a generic system, using the System box, to be the assembly connection
parent. Assembly connections created using member parts as their parents can be edited to
have a system parent later if needed.
System
Select the system to which the assembly connection belongs. You can define new systems
in the Systems and Specifications task. This option is unavailable if you select Member Part
Parent. Assembly connections created using a system as their parent can be edited to have
a member part as their parent later if needed.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 362

Place Assembly Connection

Name
Specify the name of the assembly connection.

Modify Auxiliary Parts Ribbon

Add/Delete Auxiliary Parts

Accept
Adds parts from selected parts to the assembly connection and saves the changes to the
database.

Reject
Removes any selected parts from the auxiliary parts list. Only selections made after the last
commit are removed.

What do you want to do?

 Place an assembly connection (on page 364)
 Edit assembly connection properties (on page 365)
 Delete an assembly connection (on page 365)
 Add auxiliary parts to an assembly connection (on page 365)
 Edit assembly connection parts (on page 366)
 Place free end cuts (on page 366)
 Edit free end cut properties (on page 366)
 Delete free end cut (on page 367)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 363

Place Assembly Connection

Place an assembly connection

1. Click Place Assembly Connection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the By Rule option if you want the software to automatically select the type of
assembly connection to place. Clear the By Rule option to select the assembly connection
type yourself.
3. Select the frame connection nearest the member end to which to apply the assembly
connection.

4. If you are selecting the assembly connection type yourself, use the Type option.
5. Click Accept .
The software automatically selects the assembly connection and displays the results.

6. Click Finish.

For more information about the types of assembly connections, see Member
Assembly Connections.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 364

Place Assembly Connection

Edit assembly connection properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Assembly Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the assembly connection to edit.

4. Click Edit > Properties.

5. Edit the assembly connection properties as needed. For more information, see Assembly
Connection Properties Dialog Box (see "Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box
(Members)" on page 367).

Delete an assembly connection

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Assembly Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the assembly connection to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Add auxiliary parts to an assembly connection

In the Molded Forms task, this command supports adding parts to an existing assembly
connection by selecting an adjacent plate, profile or member parts that have overlapping
geometry.
1. Select an existing assembly connection.

2. Click Select Auxiliary Parts on the ribbon bar.

The Select Auxiliary Parts is enabled for any assembly connection. You
can only add valid auxiliary parts to an assembly connection.

3. Click Accept to add all intersecting parts on the selected parts to the assembly
connection.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 365

Place Assembly Connection

Edit assembly connection parts

1. Select an assembly connection, and click Select Auxiliary Parts on the ribbon bar.
2. Select the parts not already connected to the selected assembly connection that have
intersecting geometry.
3. To remove a single part, re-select it from the graphic view or Workspace Explorer.

4. To remove the auxiliary parts added in the current command execution, click Reject on
the ribbon bar.

5. Click Accept to add all intersecting parts on the selected parts to the assembly
connection.

Place free end cuts

1. Click Place Assembly Connection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the unsupported frame connection nearest the member end to which you want to
apply the free end cuts.
If you select a member part, the software automatically places free end cuts at the
unsupported frame connections.
3. Click Accept.
The software automatically selects the free end cuts and displays the results.
4. Click Finish.

Edit free end cut properties

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Assembly Connections in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the free end cut to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Edit the free end cut properties as needed. For more information, see Free End Cut
Properties Dialog Box (on page 416).

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 366

Place Assembly Connection

Delete free end cut

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Assembly Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the free end cut to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box

(Members)
Specifies the properties for the member assembly connection that you are editing.
Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 367)
Definition Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 372)
Relationships Tab (on page 400)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)
Notes Tab
Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 372)
See Also
Edit assembly connection properties (on page 365)

Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog

Box)
The Occurrence tab displays the member assembly connection properties that you can edit or
that are automatically determined by the software at placement. The property name appears on
the left side of the grid, and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the
grid. If you selected more than one assembly connection, and then selected the properties
command, only the common properties between the selected assembly connections display.
When viewing properties for a single assembly connection, the following properties display.
More properties may display depending on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the
Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on properties.
Name
Displays the name of the assembly connection. The assembly connection name is based on
the Name Rule selection. To type a new name for the assembly connection, in the Name
Rule box, select User Defined, and then type a name for the assembly connection in the
Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this assembly connection.
 Default Name Rule - Names the assembly connection using this format: <assembly
connection>-<location>-<unique index> where <assembly connection> is the name of
the assembly connection defined in the catalog, <location> is the global workshare
location, and <unique index> is an index number that starts at 0001. For example,
GussetPlateAsmConn_1-1-0045.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 367

Place Assembly Connection

 User Defined - Select to specify the assembly connection name yourself in the Name
box.
System
Select the system to which the assembly connection that you are placing belongs. You can
create new systems in the Systems and Specifications task.

Base Plate Assembly Connection Properties

Depth Clearance
Specify the clearance between the flange of the member and the edge of the base plate.
This is dimension C in the figure.
Width Clearance
Specify the clearance between the flange of the member and the edge of the base plate.
This is dimension D in the figure.

Sizing Rule
Select the sizing rule method for the base plate.
Plate Category
Select the plate category.
Plate Type
Select the plate type.

Miter Assembly Connection Properties

Top Distance
Specifies the distance between the top flange of the member section and the top of the
plate.
Bottom Distance
Specifies the distance between the bottom flange of the member section and the bottom of
the plate.
Left Distance
Specifies the distance between the left edge of the member section and the left edge of the
plate.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 368

Place Assembly Connection

Right Distance
Specifies the distance between the right edge of the member section and the right edge of
the plate.
Symmetry
Controls how to cut back the member ends when the clearance value is not zero. Select
Center to specify that both members are cut back equally. Select Right to specify that the
first member that you selected be cut back. Select Left to specify that the second member
that you selected be cut back.
With Plates
Specifies whether or not a plate is inserted between the member ends. Select False to not
place the plate. Select True to place the plate.
Clearance
Specifies the distance between the member ends.
Sizing Rule
Select the sizing rule method for the base plate.
Plate Category
Select the plate category.
Plate Type
Select the plate type.

Slab by Member Boundary

Clearance
Type a clearance distance between the edge of the slab and the member.
Port Face Position
Select the location on the member at which the slab is to stop. You can select the outmost
plane, the centerline, or the in-most plane on the member.
Detailed Connection
Select True to trim the slab using the boundary member as the cutting edge. Select False to
not trim the slab.
Offset
Specify the distance between the selected Port Face Position and the edge of the slab. A
negative value moves the edge into the body of the slab. A positive value moves the edge
out from the body of the slab.

Slab by Slab Assembly

Trim Type
Defines the type of trimming.
 By Whole Slab - Trim by the slab boundary geometry before trim.
 By Lateral Face - Trim by the slab boundary geometry after trim.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 369

Place Assembly Connection

 By Extended Lateral Face - Trim by the extension of the lateral face of the slab
boundary.
Trim Excess Material
Specify whether to trim the exceeding part.
Trim Excess Material Offset
Specify the offset applied on the lateral face used to trim.
Offset
Specify the distance between the selected boundary object and the edge of the slab.

Slab Free Edge Assembly

Reference Direction
Select the reference direction for the angle:
Normal
The angle is measured from a vector perpendicular to the slab edge.
 Horizontal - The angle is measured from the global XY plane in the model.
 Vertical - The angle is measured from the Z-Axis in the model.
Angle
Type a slope for the slab edge represented by the assembly connection. If the slab was
place using the Face Position Top, the side face rotates about the top slab edge. If the slab
was placed using the Face Position Bottom, the side face rotates about the bottom slab
edge.
Offset
Specify the distance between the selected boundary object and the edge of the slab.

Splice Assembly Connection Properties

Symmetry
Controls how to cut back the member ends when the clearance value is not zero. Select
Center to specify that both members are cut back equally. Select Right to specify that the
first member that you selected be cut back. Select Left to specify that the second member
that you selected be cut back.
Clearance
Specifies the distance between the ends of the members.
Splice With
Select the plates that you want to use in the splice.
Web Plate Position
Select a web plate position.
Distance from flange gage line
Specifies the distance from the flange gage line.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 370

Place Assembly Connection

Distance from web gage line

Specifies the distance from the web gage line.
Sizing Rule
Select the sizing rule method for the base plate.
Flange Plate Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the flange plates.
Flange Plate Length
Specifies the length of the flange plates.
Flange Plate Width
Specifies the width of the flange plates.
Flange Plate Category
Select the plate category for the flange plates.
Flange Plate Type
Select the plate type for the flange plates.
Web Plate Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the web plates
Web Plate Length
Specifies the length of the web plates.
Web Plate Width
Specifies the width of the web plates.
Web Plate Category
Select the plate category for the web plates.
Web Plate Type
Select the plate type for the web plates.

General Surface Assembly Connection Properties

With Pad
Select True to place a steel pad between the member end and the surface. Select False to
have the member end connect directly to the surface.
Pad Type
Select the shape of the pad.
Sizing Rule
Select whether you want to the software to automatically size the pad or if you want to size
the pad.
Offset
Type the distance between the end of the member and the face of the surface.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 371

Place Assembly Connection

See Also
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (see "Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box
(Members)" on page 367)

Definition Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box)

The Definition tab displays the member assembly connection properties as they are defined in
the reference data. The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the
corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid. If you selected more than
one assembly connection and then selected the properties command, only the common
properties between the selected assembly connections display.
The properties that display depend on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the
Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on the properties.
See Also
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (see "Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box
(Members)" on page 367)

Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for the member assembly connection. Assembly connection rule
selections affect the selections available for other smart occurrence objects that are children of
the assembly connection.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 372

Place Assembly Connection

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

 The available questions, answers, and results vary depending upon the detailed parts
associated with the connection.
 The questions in each Selection tab represent the default rules delivered with the software.
Customized rules may have different questions.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 373

SECTION 29

Place Manual Chamfer

Creates a manual chamfer between two detailed parts. This command supports creation of a
chamfer between the following part types:
 Detailed plate parts
 Standard member parts
 Detailed edge reinforcements
 Any combination of the previous parts

Place Manual Chamfer Ribbon

Controls options for placing a chamfer between two detailed part ports. The parts do not have to
be connected.
Properties
Displays the Chamfer Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the chamfer before it is written to the database. For more information, see
Chamfer Properties Dialog Box (on page 429).
Chamfer Method
Displays images corresponding to supported methods for creating a manual chamfer.

 Bounded Plate Chamfer - Initiates chamfer creation by selecting part, face,

and face.

 Unbounded Plate Chamfer - Initiates chamfer creation by selecting part and

face.

 Edge Reinforcement Chamfer - Initiates chamfer selection by selecting an edge

reinforcement part and face.
Select Parent Part
Select the part that contains the first port to use in creating the chamfer. This part is the
parent of the chamfer.

Select Port to be connected from Parent Part

Specifies a port from the parent part. This port is used as the first input to the chamfer for
bounded or unbounded chamfers.
Select Other Port to connect to
Specifies a port from another part that overlaps the port from the parent part. This port is not
required for an unbounded chamfer.
Select Port on End Cut
Specifies a port on the Edge Reinforcement end cut of the chamfer.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 374

Place Manual Chamfer

Finish
Creates the chamfer.
Chamfer Class
Specifies the chamfer root class for the chamfer.
Chamfer Item
Specifies the chamfer.
Rule Based
Enables or disables the Chamfer Item list. Selecting this check box disables the Chamfer
Item list.
Extension Type
Allows you to select the length options for a chamfer. Select Overlap, Full Edge, or Extend
by Value.
 Extension 1 - Specifies the start of the extension length. This option is available only
when Extend by Value is selected.
 Extension 2 - Specifies the end of the extension length. This option is available only
when Extend by Value is selected.

What do you want to do?

 Place a manual chamfer (on page 375)
 Modify a chamfer (on page 376)
 Delete a smart occurrence object (on page 58)
 Modify a smart occurrence object (on page 58)

Place a manual chamfer

1. Click Place Manual Chamfer .
2. Select a chamfer creation method from the Chamfer Method list.

 Bounded Plate Chamfer

 UnBounded Plate Chamfer

 Edge Reinforcement Chamfer

3. Select the part that contains the first port.
4. Select a port from the selected part.
5. For a non-single port chamfer, select the overlapping port from another part.
Only ports that have overlapping geometry and do not currently have a chamfer are
available for selection.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 375

Place Manual Chamfer

The software creates a chamfer between the selected ports.

Displays the date and time of the previous generation of the list of new and modified parts.
Reset Date/Time to
Replaces the start value of the last time the service was run. This time is used to search for
new and modified parts.
Processing Status
Displays information about the number of parts processed and an estimation of the time
remaining.
Start
Starts the board management service.
Stop
Quits the board management service without completing the process.
Close
Saves the values and closes the dialog box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 379

SECTION 31

Board Assignment by Filter

The Tools > Board Assignment by Filter command updates the symmetry of plate parts,
profile parts, seams, features, openings, and hole traces by using filters that you define to select
candidates and target objects. A candidate object is an object that is having its symmetry
updated. A target object is a symmetrical object to a candidate object about the center plane.

Run board assignment by filter

1. Select Tools > Board Assignment by Filter.
2. Select the required filters.
3. Define the log file name and location.
4. Click Start.

Board Assignment by Filter Dialog

Displays the options to select an assembly, block, or system from the Workspace Explorer, or
the options to create or select an existing filter on which the Board Assignment by Filter
command is to run. This dialog also displays the different filters you can select for filtering
candidate and target objects, and a path for the log file.
Select Assembly/Block/System
Select to choose an assembly, block, or system from the Workspace Explorer on which to
run the board assignment.
Select/Create Filter
Select to create or select a filter on which to run the board assignment.
Hull Seams
Select to include hull seams as valid candidate objects.
Interior Seams
Select to include seams that are not on the hull as valid candidate objects.
Inner Contours
Select to include features and openings as valid candidate objects.
Override Manual Symmetry
Select to include objects whose symmetry was manually overridden as valid candidate and
target objects. The override flag is reset to false on these objects.
By Type
Select to allow only target objects that are of the same type as the candidate object be set
as symmetrical to the candidate object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 380

Board Assignment by Filter

By Naming Category
Select to allow only target objects that have the same naming category as the candidate
object be set as symmetrical to the candidate object.
By Region
Select to allow only target objects within range of the candidate object be set as symmetrical
to the candidate object. The range is a bounding box of the candidate object mirrored about
the center plane. You can expand this range by entering a value in the Growth field.
Log File
Specifies the log file folder path, which defaults to the local Temp folder. Click Log File to
select a different folder location. See Board Assignment by Filter Progress Bar (on page
381) for more information about the log file.
Start
Starts the board assignment process using the selected object or filter. You can continue
working in the model while the software evaluates valid candidate parts and updates their
symmetry.

Board Assignment by Filter Progress Bar

Board Assignment Title
Displays which selection or filter Board Assignment is processing.
Part # / #
Indicates which object out of the total number of objects is being processed.
Processing Object
Displays the name of the object being processed. This appears below the progress bar.
View Log File
Opens the log file generated by Board Assignment. The log file lists all of the parts that
passed the filter and were processed. The object’s symmetry might have already been set
and therefore not updated.

Log File
-------------------------BOARD ASSIGNMENT BY FILTER LOG----------------
---------
Selected Assembly/Block/System: [selected object or filter name]
Filters Applied to Target Selection: Type, Naming Category, Region with
Growth 0.5 m
Including Additional Objects: Hull Seams, Inner Contours,
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
---------

Candidate Object, Status, Symmetry Value, Target Object

[candidate object name], Successfully Updated, Port,

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 381

Board Assignment by Filter

[candidate object name], Successfully Updated, Symmetry: Port And

Starboard, [target object name]
[candidate object name], Existing Symmetry Kept, Starboard,
[candidate object name], Existing Symmetry Kept, Centered,
Selected
The first line of the log header states either “Selected Assembly/Block/System:” or “Selected
Filter:”, and is followed by the name of the selected object or filter.
Filters Applied to Target Selection
The second line of the log header lists the filters applied to the target selection.
Including Additional Objects
The third line of the log header lists the additional objects included as candidate objects.
Candidate Object, Status, Symmetry Value, Target Object
These are the list of headers. Each log consists of the candidate object name, status,
symmetry value, and target object name (if there is a target object). This is a comma-
delimited file that can be read by Microsoft Excel. The status is “Successfully Updated” if the
object’s symmetry was changed and a commit was done. The status is “Existing Symmetry
Kept” if the object’s existing symmetry was correct, not updated, and no commit was done.
The status is “Unexpected Error Occurred” if something failed during Board Assignment.
The name of the candidate object is listed so you can investigate.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 382

SECTION 32

Submit Batch Job

Tools > Submit Batch Job runs batch processes using the Intergraph Batch Services
framework.
This command runs the following types of batch jobs:
Detailing:
 Detail parts
 Undetail parts
 Update reports
Production:
 Generate manufacturing parts
 Generate XML output files
 Manufacturing Service Manager update
Custom batch processes:
 BO recompute
 Other custom batch processes that you define.

What do you want to do?

 Run a detailing batch process (on page 383)
 Run a production batch process (on page 384)
 Run a custom batch process (on page 384)
 Add a custom batch process (on page 385)

Run a detailing batch process

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 383

Submit Batch Job

4. Select the process to run from the Select Batch Process list, and click OK.
Smart 3D returns to the Generic Batch Command dialog box.
5. Specify the Batch Input Type, and add inputs as necessary.
6. Click Schedule.
The Schedule [Task] Batch Job dialog box displays.
7. Set up the parameters to run the batch job. For more information, see Schedule [Task]
Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Run a production batch process

1. Click Tools > Submit Batch Job.
The Generic Batch Command dialog box displays.
2. Select the batch process to run from the Batch Process list. If the process you want to run
is not in the list, select More from the Batch Process list.
The Batch Process Selection dialog box displays.
3. Select Production > Manufacturing from the Batch Process Type list.
Smart 3D displays the available production batch processes in the Select Batch Process
list.
4. Select the process to run from the Select Batch Process list, and click OK.
Smart 3D returns to the Generic Batch Command dialog box.
5. Specify the Batch Input Type, and add inputs as necessary.
6. Click Schedule.
The Schedule [Task] Batch Job dialog box displays.
7. Set up the parameters to run the batch job. For more information, see Schedule [Task]
Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Run a custom batch process

1. Click Tools > Submit Batch Job.
The Generic Batch Command dialog box displays.
2. Select the batch process to run from the Batch Process list. If the process you want to run
is not in the list, select More from the Batch Process list.
The Batch Process Selection dialog box displays.
3. Select Custom Batch Processes from the Batch Process Type list.
Smart 3D displays the available custom batch processes in the Select Batch Process list.
4. Select the process to run from the Select Batch Process list, and click OK.
Smart 3D returns to the Generic Batch Command dialog box.
5. Specify the Batch Input Type, and add inputs as necessary.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 384

Submit Batch Job

6. Click Schedule.
The Schedule [Task] Batch Job dialog box displays.
7. Set up the parameters to run the batch job. For more information, see Schedule [Task]
Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Add a custom batch process

1. Add the ProgID and job description of the custom batch process to the <Product
Folder>\CommonShip\SOM\Client\Xml\[Link] file.
For example:
<JOB>
<JobType>CustomBatchProcessD</JobType>
<JobType_LocaleID>103</JobType_LocaleID>
<JobDescription>Description of
CustomBatchProcessD</JobDescription>
<JobDescription_LocaleID>104</JobDescription_LocaleID>
<JobProgId> ProgID of CustomBatchProcess </JobProgId>
<IsModelSpecific>False</IsModelSpecific>
</JOB>
2. Click Tools > Submit Batch Job.
The Generic Batch Command dialog box displays.
3. Select the batch process to run from the Batch Process list. If the process you want to run
is not in the list, select More from the Batch Process list.
The Batch Process Selection dialog box displays.
4. Select Custom Batch Process from the Batch Process Type list.
The available custom batch processes display in the Select Batch Process list.
5. Select the custom process to run, and click OK.
Smart 3D returns to the Generic Batch Command dialog box.
6. Specify the Batch Input Type, and add inputs as necessary.
7. Click Schedule.
The Schedule [Task] Batch Job dialog box displays.
8. Set up the parameters to run the batch job. For more information, see Schedule [Task]
Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 385

Submit Batch Job

Generic Batch Command Dialog Box

Displays the controls used to submit a generic batch command.
Batch Process
Specifies the batch process to run. The list contains recently-selected job types. Click More
to display the Batch Process Selection dialog box, and select a process that is not on the
list. For more information, see Batch Process Selection Dialog Box (on page 387).
Batch Input Type
Indicates the input type for the batch process.
 Filter indicates that you are providing a filter as an input to the batch job.
 Assembly indicates that you are providing an assembly as input to the batch job.
 Object indicates that you are providing a set of objects as input to the batch job.

Add
Adds inputs to your batch job.
 If Filter is selected, this button displays the Select Filter dialog box so that you can add
filters as inputs to your batch job.
 If Assembly is selected, this button displays the Select Assembly dialog box so that
you can add assemblies as inputs to your batch job.
 If Object is selected, this button is not available. To add objects as inputs, select them
from the model or the Workspace Explorer.

Remove
Removes the selected inputs from the list. The software only removes the inputs that have
the associated check box selected.
Share
Saves the inputs for the next batch process. If this check box is cleared, Smart 3D clears the
inputs when you select a different batch process.
Schedule as Multiple Jobs
Processes each item in the inputs list as a separate batch process. If this check box is
cleared, Smart 3D processes all of the inputs as a single batch process.
Schedule
Displays the Schedule [Task] dialog box so that you can schedule the batch process. For
more information, see Schedule [Task] Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Cancel
Exits the command.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 386

Submit Batch Job

Batch Process Selection Dialog Box

Displays the controls used to specify the type of batch process to run.
Batch Process Type
Displays the general batch process types. Select a type to display the available batch
process of that type in the Select Batch Process list.
Select Batch Process
Displays the available batch process associated with the selected type.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 387

SECTION 33

Delay Settings (Tools Menu)

Tools > Delay Settings specifies whether changes made in Molded Forms are immediately
updated in Structural Detailing or Structural Manufacturing. When the delay is active, changes to
the Molded Form systems appear in Molded Forms, but changes needed to the corresponding
Structural Detailing and Structural Manufacturing objects are put on the To Do List. When the
delay is not active, the changes needed to the corresponding Structural Detailing and Structural
Manufacturing objects are propagated immediately.
This setting is saved in, and applies only to, your session file. Therefore, it is possible
that objects that you expect to appear in the To Do List propagate instead because they are
used in someone else's session where the delay setting is off.
This command opens the Delay Operations dialog box.

What do you want to do?

 Turn on delay operations (on page 388)
 Update delayed objects (on page 388)
 Turn off delay operations (on page 389)

Turn on delay operations

1. Click Tools > Delay Settings.
2. Click the Delay Settings tab.
3. Turn on the Delay Structure Operations options that meet your requirements.
4. Click OK.

Update delayed objects

1. Click Tools > Delay Settings.
2. Click the Update To Do Records tab.
3. Define the record filter as required.
4. Type a file name and folder path for the error file.
5. Click Update.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 388

Delay Settings (Tools Menu)

Turn off delay operations

1. Click Tools > Delay Settings.
2. On the Delay Settings tab, click No Delay.
3. Click OK.

Delay Operations Dialog Box

Displays settings for the Delay Settings command.
Delay Settings Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) (on page 389)
Update To Do Records Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) (on page 390)
To Do Delay Record Detail Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) (on page 391)

Delay Settings Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box)

Specifies the delay operation, if any, that you want taken.

Report Data Generation

Delay Report Data
Select to disable the report data generation.

Delay Structure Operations

No Delay
Select this option to have changes to the Structural Manufacturing and Structural Detailing
objects propagated when the Molded Form object changes.
Delay Molded Forms
Select this option to have changes to the Molded objects sent to the To Do List instead of
being propagated.
Delay Struct Detailing
Select this option to have changes to the Structural Detailing objects sent to the To Do List
when the Molded Form object changes. This option is available only when the Delay
Settings command is started from Molded Forms.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 389

Delay Settings (Tools Menu)

Update To Do Records Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box)

Controls how objects that you have delayed to the To Do List are updated.

To Do Record Filters
User Name
Select the user name to filter the To Do List records by.
Dates
Define the starting (From) and ending (To) dates to filter the To Do List records by.
Order
Select the order in which to process the To Do List records. Select None, Optimal,
Ascending, or Descending.
Select Optimal to allow the software to pick the order of updating that most logically
clears records from the To Do List.
Type
Select which type of To Do List records to process. Select Errors, Warnings, Out-of-Date,
Out-of-Date Reporting, or Out-of-Date Molded Forms.
Structure to Update
This option is available only when the Out-of-Date Molded Forms option is selected in the
Type section.
Select All, Hull, or Select a Filter.
 All or Hull updates the objects accordingly.
 Select a Filter launches additional options, Create New Filter and More (Select from
Existing Filters). Both options require you to select a filter before the system can update
the objects.

Update To Do Records
Update Objects
Click to update all To Do List records that satisfy the filter you have defined. Objects are
updated in the selected order.
Cancel Update
Stops the update process.
Batch Update
Click to update all To Do List records that meet the requirements for the filters that you
have defined through the Batch process. The system updates objects in the optimal order.
This option is available only when the Out-of-Date Reporting option is selected in the Type
section.

Log
Log File
Type a file name and folder path for the error log.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 390

Delay Settings (Tools Menu)

Enable Logging
Turn on to generate the log file.
View Log File
Click to display the error log.

To Do Delay Record Detail Tab (Delay Operations Dialog

Box)
Displays detailed information about the delayed To Do List records.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 391

SECTION 34

Check Manufacturability
Tools > Check Manufacturability (Tools > Check Hole in the Hole Management task)
analyzes objects in the current workspace and reports the objects that will be difficult or
impossible to manufacture according to standards defined in the reference data.

Check Manufacturability Ribbon

Provides the following options to check that objects in the model can be manufactured and to
generate production information.
Manufacturability Checking Settings
Shows the rules for the checking process. You can select any or all of the rules. For more
information, see Manufacturability Checking Settings Dialog Box (on page 394).

Check Manufacturability
Starts the checking process. If inconsistencies are found, the message Manufacturability
errors/warnings have been encountered displays.

Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies

Displays the objects with manufacturing issues. The list includes the issue severity, the
assembly name, a description of the assembly, and the name of the rule which detected the
manufacturing issue. For more information, see Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies
Dialog Box (on page 395).
Close
Exits the command.
Submit Job
Displays a message box asking if you want to execute the repair rules subsequently. If you
click Yes, the Schedule Planning Check Manufacturability dialog box displays so that
you can schedule the execution of the repair rules at some other time. For more information,
see Schedule [Task] Dialog Box (on page 325) in the Batch Services User's Guide and the
Batch Services Quick Start Guide.

 Learn more about Intergraph Batch Services in the Batch Services User's Guide and the
Batch Services Quick Start Guide.
 The Submit Job button is enabled only when Batch Services is installed and started on
your computer.
 The data on objects that cannot be manufactured is stored in the session file, not in the
model. Problem objects that apply to the Workspace are retrieved when you select the
Check Manufacturability command.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 392

Check Manufacturability

What do you want to do?

 Check objects for manufacturability (on page 393)
 Schedule check manufacturability using Batch Services (on page 393)
 View the Manufacturability Checking Settings Dialog Box (on page 394)
 View the Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies Dialog Box (on page 395)

Check objects for manufacturability

1. Select objects for checking in the model or in the Workspace Explorer.
2. Click Tools > Check Manufacturability (Tools > Check Holes in Hole Management).
3. On the ribbon, click Manufacturability Checking Settings .
4. Specify the rules for the checking process.

5. On the ribbon, click Check Manufacturability to start the process.

6. On the ribbon, click Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies .

A list view displays the objects that were found to have manufacturing problems.
7. Select one row of the list at a time to view the inconsistency and solution for an object.
8. Repair the object manually, or click Repair if an Action Tool is available.

Schedule check manufacturability using Batch

Services
1. Select objects for checking in the model or in the Workspace Explorer.
2. Click Tools > Check Manufacturability.
In Hole Management, click Tools > Check Hole.
3. On the ribbon, click Manufacturability Checking Settings .
4. Specify the rules for the checking process.
5. Click Submit Job.
6. Click Yes to schedule the job for another time.
7. Complete the Schedule Check Manufacturability dialog box to configure batch
processing, and then click OK.
The software displays the message, "This job has been scheduled to run on the chosen
server."

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 393

Check Manufacturability

8. Click OK to dismiss the message.

 For more information about Intergraph Batch Services, see the Batch Services User's Guide
and the Batch Services Quick Start Guide.
 After the job is successfully submitted, you can see the PlanningCheckMfcty_BatchJob.xml
file in the system temp folder (%temp%). This file contains the required information to run
the batch job.
 If any inconsistencies are observed during the execution of the check manufacturability rules
that you selected, information about the name of the object, manufacturability rule ProgID,
and repair rule ProgID are written to the PlanningCheckMfcty_InConsistencies.log file in the
system temp folder (%temp%).

Manufacturability Checking Settings Dialog Box

Sets options for the Check Manufacturability process.
Task List
Displays the list of tasks that contains the Check Manufacturability rules defined in the
catalog. These tasks allow you to filter the check rules based on the selected task in the
Task List.
Rule
Select which rules to process check manufacturability against. There are different rules
based on the task selected in the Task List option. Contact Intergraph Support
[Link] for help with customizing the XML data file.
 The Hole Management manufacturability checking process includes checking the
distance between hole traces; the distance between the hole trace and plate edges
(outside), brackets and coamings; and the distance between the hole trace and
seamlines, profiles, and openings. Because hole traces can affect the stress of the deck
or bulkhead on which they are placed, it is important to check holes before cutting them.
For more information about hole management checks, see Check Hole Rules in the
Hole Management Reference Data Guide.
 The Piping manufacturability checking process includes software simulators for cutting,
bending, and coating pipe. An XML data file controls the piping simulators. You can
customize this file to reflect the requirements, standards, and equipment of your facility.
For more information about piping checks, see Piping Check Manufacturability in the
Piping Reference Data Guide.
 The Planning manufacturability checking process includes software simulators for
planning joints, weld bevels, and slot types on structure. You can customize the
planning simulators rules to reflect the requirements, standards, and equipment of your
facility. For more information about planning checks, see Check Manufacturability Rules
in Planning Reference Data.
 The Structural Detailing checking process includes tee weld chamfer checks based on
changes to plate thickness, slot opening angles, and end cut type. For more information,
see Check Manufacturability Rules in Structural Detailing Reference Data.
 The Structural Manufacturing checking process includes margin check on the same
port, manufacturing plate and profile check, and shrinkage check.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 394

Check Manufacturability

ProgID
Programming ID of the rule that found the inconsistency. Matches the Rule ProgID of the
rule on the Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies Dialog Box (on page 395) .
Select All
Specifies all available rules.
Clear All
Clears all available rules. You can select rules individually in the list view by clicking the
boxes beside the rule names.
Stop checking if a manufacturability error is found
Halts rule processing upon error detection.

Show Manufacturability Inconsistencies Dialog Box

Displays and repairs inconsistencies found by the rules of the Check Manufacturability
process.
Inconsistencies
A list view of all inconsistencies. Click the button in the far left column to see the possible
solution. Solution descriptions are listed below.

Warning
A minor manufacturability problem has been found. The problem does not have to be
repaired.

Error
A major manufacturability error has been found. The error must be repaired.
Object or Assembly
Name of the object with an inconsistency.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 395

Check Manufacturability

Description
Description from the rule of the inconsistency
Rule ProgID
Programming ID of the rule that found the inconsistency. Matches the ProgID of the rule on
the Manufacturability Checking Settings Dialog Box (on page 394) .
Action
The type of action that is available in the software to repair the inconsistency. Blank if no
software action is available and the repair is done manually.
 COM Repair Object - Software code that can be run.
 SQL Script - SQL Script that can be run.
Action Tool
ProgID of the COM Repair Object or name of the SQL Script. Blank if Action is blank.
Solutions
Describes the details of an inconsistency and the repair that you need to perform for one
selected object from the list.
Repair
Runs the Action Tool to perform a repair, if one is available for the rule.
Fit
Fits one or more selected objects from the list view in the active graphic view.
Clear
Clears all inconsistencies and closes the dialog box. You must click Check
Manufacturability again to display the remaining inconsistencies.

Piping Inconsistencies Solution Messages

Pipe and Spool Length Messages
Pipe is too long
Pipe exceeds standard ordering length for pipe of this size, as defined in the pipe catalog.
For bent pipes the length check includes any extra pipe that had to be added at the ends or
between bends for clamping (see "Extra pipe must be added at end…" and "Insufficient
straight pipe between bends…" messages below.). If the pipe is bent, the elongation of the
pipe during bending will be taken into account when reporting this error.
Pipe is too short
Pipe length is less than the company standard for pipes welded on both ends.
Spool is too long
The overall length of the spool exceeds company standards. The length is measured along
the main axis of the spool.
Spool is too wide
The "width" in the spool is measured perpendicular to the main axis. This message indicates

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 396

Relationships Tab
Displays all objects related to the selected object for which you are viewing properties. For
example, if you are viewing the properties of a pipe run, the related pipeline, features, parts,
associated control points, hangers or supports, and equipment display on this tab. All WBS
assignments, including project relationships, appear on this tab.
Additional examples for marine relationships are as follows:
 For plate and profile system properties, the related bounded objects, bounding objects, and
connections are shown.
 For plate and profile system part properties, parent systems are shown.
 For assembly connection properties, all connected objects are shown.
 For the properties of a frame connection on a member, supported, supporting, and auxiliary
supporting parts are shown.
 For split connection properties, the parent and auxiliary supporting parts are shown.
Name
Specifies the name of the object.
Type
Specifies the type of object.
Go To
Displays the properties of the selected object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 400

Property Dialog Boxes

Members Tab
Displays a grid containing the member (or child) objects of the smart occurrence object.
Name
Displays the name of the child object.
Type
The final result of rules for the smart occurrence, as displayed on the Selection tab. The
result is used to create the child object.
Go To
Select a child object in the grid and click Go To to highlight the child object in a graphic view
and in the Workspace Explorer.

Controlled Interfaces Tab

Displays the object properties and parameters that are created as a result of the smart
occurrence rules.
Object
Displays the name of the object created by the smart occurrence rule. An object may appear
more than once if multiple properties are created.
Interface
Display the name of the property or parameter created by the smart occurrence rule.
Rule Based
Displays a checkbox indicating that the property or parameter value is rule-based. Clear the
check box to modify the value in on the appropriate tab of the Properties dialog box.

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
Plant/Ship
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 401

Property Dialog Boxes

Approval State
Specifies the status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your access
level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by the
ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.
Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
[Link] file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date of the last modification to the object.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

General Tab
The General tab displays the properties that were selected by you or automatically determined
by the software at creation. The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the
corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
The properties displayed duplicate those available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. You
should edit the properties on these tabs.

Parameters Tab
Specifies the parameters for the smart occurrence object.
Parameter
Displays the name of the parameter.
Value
Displays the value of the parameter. Values that are grayed cannot be modified.
Rule-Based
Displays a check box if the parameter value is rule-based. Clear the check box to modify the
value in the Value box.
Catalog Value
Displays the original catalog value if the Value box has been modified.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 402

Property Dialog Boxes

Smart Occurrence Ribbon

Plate Part Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the plate part that you are editing.
Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 403)
Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 405)
Relationships Tab (on page 400)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)
General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 405)
Weight & CG Tab (on page 407)
Extended User Attributes Tab (on page 407)
Routing Tab (on page 166)

Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the plate part.
Name
Displays the name of the selected object. If the name is too long to entirely display in the
box, hover the cursor over the box to display the complete name as a tool tip. If the name is
not defined by a rule, User Defined displays. If this name is generated by a naming
rule, Naming Rule displays. If you type a name in this box, Smart 3D automatically
changes the naming rule to User Defined.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the object.
PlatePartRule - Creates a name based on the parent root plate system name, the location
within the parent root plate system, and the parent assembly name.
User Defined - Name the plate part yourself by using the appropriate box.
Type
Displays the type of the plate part. It is inherited from the parent system.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 403

Property Dialog Boxes

Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Displays the parent system for the object.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the root parent plate system. It is
inherited from the parent system.
Specification
Specifies the specification for the object. This property is inherited from the parent system.
Description
Specifies a description for the object.
Tightness
Specifies the water tightness of the object. This value is inherited from the parent system.
Board Management
Symmetry
Specifies the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by Tools >
Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Manually Override
When selected, allows you to manually change the Symmetry value.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 404

Property Dialog Boxes

Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the material properties for the plate part that you are editing. The material properties
are inherited from the parent system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Actual Thickness
Displays the material thickness for the object.

General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies general properties of the plate part. Some properties displayed duplicate those
available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. The property name appears on the left side of the
grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.

Category: Standard
Piece Mark
Specifies the piece mark of the member. Piece marks are typically used when importing and
exporting member through CIMsteel. If a piece mark displays, the mark is usually the
identity of the manufactured part from the other software package.
Assembly Mark
Specifies the assembly mark of the member. If the member was imported through CIMsteel,
the assembly mark is usually the identity of the manufactured assembly to which this
member belongs.
Thickening Technique Requested
Specifies the technique requested to thicken the plate part.
This property affects only the behavior of plate parts derived from systems. The property
defaults to Procedural at creation. Changing the value of this property can affect the
geometry of the part as described below.
Standalone plate parts initially display nothing for this property. You can change the value,
but those changes do not change the part or its geometry. Smart 3D thickens all standalone
plate parts, including collars, using procedural thickening.
Undefined (blank) indicates that Smart 3D selects the appropriate technique. Smart 3D
automatically changes this value to Procedural.
Procedural indicates the part is thickened using the standard thickening method provided
by the ACIS modeler. This works for the vast majority of parts, and you should not change
this value unless there is a specific reason to try a different technique.
If the thickening fails using ACIS, and the part is a hull part, the software
automatically tries the NonProcedural thickening technique. This option only controls which
method the software tries first. You can determine which method Smart 3D actually used
from the Thickening Technique Used property.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 405

Profile Section Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the profile section settings for the stiffener part.
Material
Displays the material for the stiffener part.
Grade
Displays the material grade for the stiffener part.
Section Type
Displays the profile section type.
Section Size
Displays the profile section size.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 409

Property Dialog Boxes

General Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies general properties of the stiffener part. Some properties displayed duplicate those
available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. The property name appears on the left side of the
grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
Category: Standard
Category: Planning
Build Method
Specifies the method used to position child objects in the block. The list contains all
available values as defined in the reference data for the assigned workcenter, typically
Vertical Drop, Drop at angle, Slide, and Default. The list is defined by the
BuildMethodData codelist.
Slot Connectivity
Specifies the minimum welding requirement at profile and slot intersections to meet the build
method requirements. The list contains all available values as defined in the reference data,
typically None, Webleft, Webright, Double, N/A, and Default. The list is defined by the
SlotConnectivityData codelist.

Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the assembly connection that you are editing. Assembly connection
properties affect the available selection of other smart occurrence objects that are children of the
assembly connection.
Main Tab (on page 410)
Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 411)
Relationships Tab (on page 400)
Controlled Interfaces Tab (on page 401)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)

Main Tab
Specifies the general properties of the smart occurrence object.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the object. Select User Defined to type a name in the
Name box.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the object.
Type

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 410

Property Dialog Boxes

Specifies the type of smart occurrence object.

Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for the assembly connection. Assembly connection rule
selections affect the selections available for other smart occurrence objects that are children of
the assembly connection.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Questions, Answers, and Results

The available questions, answers, and results vary depending upon the detailed parts
associated with the connection.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 411

Property Dialog Boxes

The questions in each Selection tab represent the default rules delivered with
the software. User-customized rules may have different questions.
See Also
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 410)
Smart Occurrence Ribbon (on page 403)

Slot Properties Dialog Box

Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
See Also
Collar Properties Dialog Box (on page 413)
Smart Occurrence Ribbon (on page 403)

Material Tab (Collar Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the material properties for the collar that you are editing.
Material
Select the material for the plate part.
Grade
Select the material grade for the plate part.
Actual Thickness
Select the material thickness for the plate part.
See Also
Collar Properties Dialog Box (on page 413)
Smart Occurrence Ribbon (on page 403)

Selection Tab (Collar Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for the collar.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 415

Property Dialog Boxes

Rule Based
Defines when a question is rule-driven. This option is selected by default for each question.
 Select to always use the default rule-based answer or result. For an existing object, if a
change in the model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the answer is changed to
the new default.
 Clear to manually select an answer or result. For an existing object, if a change in the
model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the manually-selected answer is not
changed to the new default. If the manually selected answer is not in the list of valid
answers, then the new default is used.
If multiple existing objects are selected and a row contains a mix of rule-
based and non-rule-based answers/results, then the Answer/Result box is blank, and
the Rule Based check is unavailable, as shown in the following example.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Questions, Answers, and Results

The questions and answers that display on this tab depend upon user-customized rules. The
questions that you see may not match those in the illustrations.
See Also
Collar Properties Dialog Box (on page 413)
Smart Occurrence Ribbon (on page 403)

Free End Cut Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the profile stiffener free end cut. The software creates a free end cut
at the end of a profile part that is not connected to another part. Free end cut properties affect
the available selection of the flange cut and web cut that are children of the free end cut.
See Also
Smart Occurrence Ribbon (on page 403)
Main Tab (on page 410)
Selection Tab (Free End Cut Properties Dialog Box) (on page 417)
Members Tab (on page 401)
Controlled Interfaces Tab (on page 401)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 416

Property Dialog Boxes

Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the object. Select User Defined to type a name in the
Name box.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the object.
Type
Specifies the type of smart occurrence object.

Selection Tab (Free End Cut Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for the profile stiffener free end cut.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 417

Property Dialog Boxes

2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Questions, Answers, and Results

The questions and answers that display on this tab depend upon user-customized rules. The
questions that you see may not match those in the illustrations.
See Also
Free End Cut Properties Dialog Box (on page 416)
Smart Occurrence Ribbon (on page 403)

Web Cut Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the profile stiffener web cut.
A web cut is based on the end cut type of the assembly connection. The end cut type must be
changed at the assembly connection level.
The following web cuts are available:
Welded
Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip
Places a snipped web and flange cut.
Cutback
Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from the
bounding object.
Bracketed
Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 418

Property Dialog Boxes

Main Tab
Specifies the general properties of the smart occurrence object.

Selection Tab (Web Cut Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for the profile stiffener free end cut.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 419

Property Dialog Boxes

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

User Answers
The questions and answers that display on this tab depend upon user-customized rules. The
questions that you see may not match those in the illustrations.
See Also
Web Cut Properties Dialog Box (on page 418)
Smart Occurrence Ribbon (on page 403)

Flange Cut Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the profile stiffener flange cut.
A flange cut corresponds to a web cut. Both are based on the end cut type of the assembly
connection. The end cut type must be changed at the assembly connection level.
The following flange cuts are available:
Welded
Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip
Places a snipped web and flange cut.
Cutback
Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from the
bounding object.
Bracketed
Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.
See Also
Smart Occurrence Ribbon (on page 403)
Main Tab (on page 412)
Selection Tab (Flange Cut Properties Dialog Box) (on page 421)
Parameters Tab (on page 402)
Members Tab (on page 401)
Controlled Interfaces Tab (on page 401)
General Tab (on page 402)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 420

Property Dialog Boxes

Main Tab
Specifies the general properties of the smart occurrence object.

Selection Tab (Flange Cut Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for the profile stiffener flange cut.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 421

Property Dialog Boxes

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Questions, Answers, and Results

The questions and answers that display on this tab depend upon user-customized rules. The
questions that you see may not match those in the illustrations.
See Also
Flange Cut Properties Dialog Box (on page 420)
Smart Occurrence Ribbon (on page 403)

Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the physical connection that you are editing.
See Also
Main Tab (Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 422)
Selection Tab (Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 423)
Bevel Parameters Tab (on page 159)
Parameters Tab (Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 424)
Members Tab (on page 401)
Controlled Interfaces Tab (on page 401)
Relationships Tab (on page 400)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)
General Tab (on page 402)

Main Tab (Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the physical connection.
Name
Specifies the name of the physical connection. Names generated by a rule include a Global
Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was
created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the physical connection. Select User Defined to type
a name in the Name box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 422

Property Dialog Boxes

Joint
Method
Specifies the method of connection, such as Welded.
Type
Specifies the type of connection using the specified Method, such as Tee Weld or Butt
Weld. Type is the same as Class on the Selection tab.

Connected Parts
Name
Specifies the name of the detailed parts connected by the physical connection. Each
detailed part is listed separately.
See Also
Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 422)
Smart Occurrence Ribbon (on page 403)

Selection Tab (Physical Connection Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for the physical connection.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 423

Property Dialog Boxes

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Questions, Answers, and Results

Bevel Parameters Tab

Parameters Tab (Physical Connection Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the parameters for the smart occurrence object.
Parameter
Displays the name of the parameter.
Value
Displays the value of the parameter. Values that are grayed cannot be modified.
Rule-Based
Displays a check box if the parameter value is rule-based. Clear the check box to modify the
value in the Value box.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 424

Property Dialog Boxes

Catalog Value
Displays the original catalog value if the Value box has been modified.

Welding Symbol Parameters

In addition to physical connection parameters, welding symbol parameters are also visible. Weld
symbols are used by the Drawings and Reports task but welding symbol parameters are only
visible on the Parameters tab for a physical connection:

1 - Primary Side Symbol or Primary Side Groove 13 - Secondary Side Pitch or Distance Between the Ends of
Adjacent Welds

2 - Secondary Side Symbol or Secondary Side Groove 14 – Primary Side Contour

3 – Primary Side Groove Size 15 – Secondary Side Contour

4 – Secondary Side Groove Size 16 – Primary Side Finish Method

5 - Primary Side Bevel Depth or Leg Length or Actual 17 – Secondary Side Finish Method
Throat Thickness or Strength

6 - Secondary Side Bevel Depth or Leg Length or Actual 18 – Primary Side Root Opening or Depth of Filling
Throat Thickness or Strength

7 – Field Weld 19 - Secondary Side Root Opening or Depth of Filling

8 - All Around 20 – Primary Side Groove Angle or Included Angle of

Countersink

9 – Tail Notes 21 - Secondary Side Groove Angle or Included Angle of

Countersink

10 – Primary Side Length 22 – Primary Side Number Of Welds

11 – Secondary Side Length 23 - Secondary Side Number Of Welds

12 – Primary Side Pitch or Distance Between the Ends

of Adjacent Welds

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 425

Property Dialog Boxes

The actual parameters provided depend upon the type of physical connection, but the following
figures are representative. For a definition of the parameters, please refer to the physical
connection documentation in the Structural Detailing Reference Data Guide.
The following example shows the welding symbol properties for a Y tee weld. Other tee welds
and lap welds are similar.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 426

Property Dialog Boxes

The next example shows the welding symbol parameters for a V butt weld. Fewer of the
parameters are exposed because many are not applicable to a butt weld.

Logical Connection Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for logical connections.
Main Tab (Logical Connections Properties Dialog Box) (on page 427)
Relationships Tab (on page 400)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)

Main Tab (Logical Connections Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the main properties for the logical connection.
Name
Displays the name of the selected object. If the name is too long to entirely display in the
box, hover the cursor over the box to display the complete name as a tool tip. If the name is
not defined by a rule, User Defined displays. If this name is generated by a naming
rule, Naming Rule displays. If you type a name in this box, Smart 3D automatically
changes the naming rule to User Defined.
Rule
Specifies the naming rule to use to name the logical connection.
 Select StdHierarchyChildNamingRule to use the following syntax: <Parent Name>-
LC<Index Number>. For example, D0-1DCK-1-LC101, where D0 is the reference plane,
1DCK is an index number appended by the plate type (Deck in this example), 1 is the

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 427

Property Dialog Boxes

Workshare Location ID, and LC101 is "Logical Connection" appended by an index

number.
 Select User Defined to name the logical connection yourself by using the appropriate
box.
Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system of the logical connection.
Type
Displays the object type, which in this case is Logical Connection.

General Tab (Logical Connections Properties Dialog Box)

Displays the general properties for the logical connection.

Optional Corner Trim Property

See Also
Smart Occurrence Ribbon (on page 403)
Main Tab (on page 412)
Selection Tab (Chamfer Properties Dialog Box) (on page 432)
Parameters Tab (on page 402)
Members Tab (on page 401)
Controlled Interfaces Tab (on page 401)

Main Tab
Specifies the general properties of the smart occurrence object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 431

Property Dialog Boxes

Selection Tab (Chamfer Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the rule criteria used for the plate chamfer.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Questions, Answers, and Results

The questions and answers that display on this tab depend upon user-customized rules. The
questions that you see may not match those in the illustrations.
See Also
Chamfer Properties Dialog Box (on page 429)
Smart Occurrence Ribbon (on page 403)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 432

Property Dialog Boxes

Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the linear beam.
See Also
Cross Section Tab (Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box) (on page 434)
Main Tab (Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box) (on page 433)
Relationships Tab (on page 400)
Section Orientation Tab (Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box) (on page 434)

Main Tab (Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties for the linear beam part.
Name
Displays the name to assign to the beam part. Names generated by a rule include a Global
Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was
created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Specifies how the name is created. If set to a naming rule, the software automatically
generates the name for you. If you select User Defined, you can type in the linear beam
name in the Name box.
Type
Select the type of linear beam.
Naming Category
Select a naming category. The category is used by the naming rule to name the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system of the linear beam.
Specification
Select a specification for the edge reinforcement linear beam.
Description
Type a description for the linear beam.

Board Management
Symmetry
Displays the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by the Board
Management Service.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by the Board Management Service.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 433

Property Dialog Boxes

See Also
Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box (on page 433)

Cross Section Tab (Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the cross section properties for the linear beam.
Section Type
Select the profile section type. The software displays the section type properties for the
section type that you selected. Each section type has different properties.
Section Size
Select the profile section size.
Material
Select the material for the profile.
Grade
Select the material grade for the profile. Different material grade are available depending on
the material that you selected.
See Also
Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box (on page 433)

Section Orientation Tab (Linear Beam Properties Dialog

Box)
Specifies the position of the linear beam cross section.
Beam Axis Orientation Rule
Specifies the direction to which the linear beam axis is constrained.
Beam Type
Specifies the type of linear beam.
Primary Orientation
Specifies the primary orientation of the linear beam's cross section. The local v-axis of the
cross section is aligned with this direction.
Load Point
Select the cross-sectional load point through which the linear beam axis will pass.
See Also
Linear Beam Properties Dialog Box (on page 433)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 434

Property Dialog Boxes

Beam Part Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the beam part that you are editing. Default properties are inherited
from the parent system of the part.
Main Tab (Beam Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 435)
Cross Section Tab (on page 171)
Section Orientation Tab (Beam Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 436)
Relationships Tab (on page 400)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)
General Tab (Beam Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 436)
Weight & CG Tab (on page 407)
Extended User Attributes Tab (on page 407)

Main Tab (Beam Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the general properties of the beam part.
Name
Displays the name of the selected object. If the name is too long to entirely display in the
box, hover the cursor over the box to display the complete name as a tool tip. If the name is
not defined by a rule, User Defined displays. If this name is generated by a naming
rule, Naming Rule displays. If you type a name in this box, Smart 3D automatically
changes the naming rule to User Defined.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the beam part.
 Select BeamPartRule to create a name based on the parent root profile system name,
the location within the parent root profile system, and the parent assembly name.
 Select User Defined to name the part yourself by using the appropriate box.
Type
Displays the type of the part. It is inherited from the parent system.
Naming Category
Select a category for the beam part. Categories specify the role of the part in the model.
Parent System
Displays the parent system for the beam part.
Specification
Displays the structural specification for the beam part. It is inherited from the parent system.
Description
Type a description for the beam part.
Board Management

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 435

Property Dialog Boxes

Symmetry
Specifies the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by Tools >
Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Manually Override
When selected, allows you to manually change the Symmetry value.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.

Section Orientation Tab (Beam Part Properties Dialog Box)

Specifies the position of the linear beam cross-section. The properties duplicate those available
on the Section Orientation tab in the Linear Beam Properties dialog box.
Beam Axis Orientation Rule
Specifies the direction to which the linear beam axis is constrained.
Beam Type
Specifies the type of linear beam.
Primary Orientation
Specifies the primary orientation of the linear beam's cross-section. The local v-axis of the
cross-section is aligned with this direction.
Load Point
Select the cross-section load point through which the linear beam axis passes.
See Also
Beam Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 435)

General Tab (Beam Part Properties Dialog Box)

Category: Standard
BeamAxisRuleType
Specifies the direction to which the linear beam axis is constrained.
BeamType
Specifies the type of linear beam.
Description
Specifies a description for the object.
FlipAboutU
Specifies whether to flip the linear beam cross-section about the local u-axis of the beam.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 436

Property Dialog Boxes

FlipAboutV
Specifies whether to flip the linear beam cross-section about the local v-axis of the beam.
PrimeOrientation
Specifies the primary orientation of the linear beam's cross-section. The local v-axis of the
cross-section is aligned with this direction.
RotationAngle
Specifies the rotation of the cross-section about its local axis.

Category: Planning
Build Method
Specifies the method used to position child objects in the block. The list contains all
available values as defined in the reference data for the assigned workcenter, typically
Vertical Drop, Drop at angle, Slide, and Default. The list is defined by the
BuildMethodData codelist.
Slot Connectivity
Specifies the minimum welding requirement at profile and slot intersections to meet the build
method requirements. The list contains all available values as defined in the reference data,
typically None, Webleft, Webright, Double, N/A, and Default. The list is defined by the
SlotConnectivityData codelist.
See Also
Beam Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 435)

Plate Edge Reinforcement Part Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the plate edge reinforcement that you are editing.
See Also
Main Tab (Plate Edge Reinforcement Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 170)
Material Tab (on page 100)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)

Main Tab (Plate Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 437

Property Dialog Boxes

Naming Category
Select a category for the part. Categories specify the role of the part in the model. The
category is also used by the naming rule to name the part.
Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system of the part.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the root parent plate system. It is
inherited from the parent system.
Description
Type a description for the edge reinforcement profile.
Specification
Select a specification for the edge reinforcement profile.
Symmetry
Displays the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by the Board
Management Service.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by the Board Management Service.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.

Profile Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 438

Property Dialog Boxes

Weight & CG Tab (on page 407)

Sketched Feature Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the properties for the sketched feature.
See Also
Main Tab (Sketched Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 442)
Catalog Tab (Sketched Feature Properties Dialog Box) (on page 443)
Configuration Tab (on page 401)

Main Tab (Sketched Feature Properties Dialog Box)

Feature Name
Name
Specifies the name of the sketched feature. Names generated by a rule include a Global
Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was
created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use. Select User Defined to specify the name yourself in the
Name box.

Opening Properties
Opening design type
Specifies the design opening property for the opening or hole. The default value is
Permanent Access. The list is defined by the CutoutDesignType codelist.
Opening planning method
Specifies the planning opening property for the opening or hole. The default value is
Design. The list is defined by the CutoutPlanningMethod codelist.
Opening production method
Specifies the production opening property for the opening or hole. The default value is Cut.
The list is defined by the CutoutProductionMethod codelist.
For more information about sketched feature opening properties, see Place Sketched
Features (on page 148).

Board Management
Symmetry
Specifies the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by Tools >
Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Manually Override
When selected, allows you to manually change the Symmetry value.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 442

Property Dialog Boxes

See Also
Sketched Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 442)

Catalog Tab (Sketched Feature Properties Dialog Box)

Lists all the sketched feature shapes that are available in the catalog. Using the tree view,
browse through the catalog to find the feature. You can see a preview in the Preview area. All
parameters and values for those parameters also display when you select a sketched feature
opening from the catalog.
See Also
Sketched Feature Properties Dialog Box (on page 442)

Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box

Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 443

Property Dialog Boxes

location, and <unique index> is an index number that starts at 0001. For example,
GussetPlateAsmConn_1-1-0045.
 User Defined - Select to specify the assembly connection name yourself in the Name
box.
System
Select the system to which the assembly connection that you are placing belongs. You can
create new systems in the Systems and Specifications task.

Base Plate Assembly Connection Properties

Sizing Rule
Select the sizing rule method for the base plate.
Plate Category
Select the plate category.
Plate Type
Select the plate type.

Miter Assembly Connection Properties

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 444

Property Dialog Boxes

plate.
Right Distance
Specifies the distance between the right edge of the member section and the right edge of
the plate.
Symmetry
Controls how to cut back the member ends when the clearance value is not zero. Select
Center to specify that both members are cut back equally. Select Right to specify that the
first member that you selected be cut back. Select Left to specify that the second member
that you selected be cut back.
With Plates
Specifies whether or not a plate is inserted between the member ends. Select False to not
place the plate. Select True to place the plate.
Clearance
Specifies the distance between the member ends.
Sizing Rule
Select the sizing rule method for the base plate.
Plate Category
Select the plate category.
Plate Type
Select the plate type.

Slab by Member Boundary

Slab by Slab Assembly

Trim Type
Defines the type of trimming.
 By Whole Slab - Trim by the slab boundary geometry before trim.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 445

Property Dialog Boxes

 By Lateral Face - Trim by the slab boundary geometry after trim.

Slab Free Edge Assembly

Splice Assembly Connection Properties

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 446

Property Dialog Boxes

Specifies the distance from the flange gage line.

Distance from web gage line
Specifies the distance from the web gage line.
Sizing Rule
Select the sizing rule method for the base plate.
Flange Plate Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the flange plates.
Flange Plate Length
Specifies the length of the flange plates.
Flange Plate Width
Specifies the width of the flange plates.
Flange Plate Category
Select the plate category for the flange plates.
Flange Plate Type
Select the plate type for the flange plates.
Web Plate Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the web plates
Web Plate Length
Specifies the length of the web plates.
Web Plate Width
Specifies the width of the web plates.
Web Plate Category
Select the plate category for the web plates.
Web Plate Type
Select the plate type for the web plates.

General Surface Assembly Connection Properties

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 447

Property Dialog Boxes

Type the distance between the end of the member and the face of the surface.
See Also
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (see "Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box
(Members)" on page 367)

Definition Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box)

Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box)

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 448

Property Dialog Boxes

changed to the new default. If the manually selected answer is not in the list of valid
answers, then the new default is used.
If multiple existing objects are selected and a row contains a mix of rule-
based and non-rule-based answers/results, then the Answer/Result box is blank, and
the Rule Based check is unavailable, as shown in the following example.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 449

APPENDIX B

2D Symbol Logging Settings

Sets debug registry keys for Middle Marine RAD Symbols. These symbols are used by Molded
Forms, Structural Detailing, and Structural Manufacturing. This utility runs independently of
Smart 3D.
The [Link] file is delivered to the [Product
Folder]\Core\Container\Bin\Assemblies\Release folder by default.
Task
Indicates the task for which you are loading the .xml file. Depending on the task you select
(Molded Forms, Structural Detailing, or Structural Manufacturing), the software loads the
appropriate data into the grid view.
Disable All Log
Indicates whether the grid view is available. If this option is selected, the grid view is
unavailable, and the software deletes all of the associated registry entries when you click
Finish.
Default
Indicates whether the software loads the values from the defaultdebugkey node in the
[Link] file into the Debug Key column of the grid view.
Symbol Type
Displays the symbol project name from the .xml file. This value can vary depending on the
value in the Task box. You cannot edit this value.
Symbol Name
Displays the symbol prog ID name from the .xml file. This value can vary depending on the
value in the Task box. You cannot edit this value.
Debug Key
Provides a list of the keys from the symbol debug key node. This list can vary depending on
the value in the Task box. Select a value from the list.
Browse
Navigates to the .xml file to load into the grid view. Typically, this is the
[Link] file, which is located in the [Product
Folder]\CommonShip\Environment\Xml\Include folder.
Finish
Writes the data displayed in the grid view to the registry.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 450

Glossary
abaft
Toward the stern of a ship, behind, further aft than.
abstract part
A part that is only defined by a partial specification and that cannot be materially provided by the
organization that defines the specification.
access holes
An opening cut in the structure of a ship to permit entering or leaving various compartments.
Active Template Library (ATL)
Set of class templates and wizards supplied with Microsoft C++ Version 5.0 and later. You can
use an ATL when you create ActiveX controls and any other type of object that uses the
Component Object Model (COM). Using an ATL is generally preferred over Microsoft
Foundation Classes (MFC), because the implementations are smaller, easier to use, and more
closely tied to the COM model.
aft
Toward, at, or near the stern.
after body
The hull from aft of the midship section.
aftermost
Nearest the stern.
angle
The circular measurement taken from the intersection of two pipes at a turn or branch.
approval state
Recorded state of acceptance of information contained in objects within the database. The
approval states indicate a level of confidence in the information stored in the database and
govern your ability to alter specific data about a product.
arrangement (accommodation)
Those components of a system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional
representation for installation. Various types include electrical, HVAC, machinery, outfitting, and
piping.
attribute
A single type of non-graphics information that is stored about an object such as diameter or end
preparation.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 451

Glossary

axis
An imaginary line used to define the orientation of a system or object normally defined in terms
of an x-, y-, and z-axis. Some 3-D graphic objects have an associated axis used to define the
center or axis for rotations.
basic design
Engineering definition of the model and its systems.
bending
Process of conforming a plate to the hull surface. A bending process can be either simple (bent
in one direction) or compound (bent in multiple directions). The software must minimize
compound bending requirements.
bill of material (BOM)
Hierarchical decomposition of a product into constituent assemblies and parts. Specific types of
BOMs exist (for example, an EBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of an engineering
department; an MBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of manufacturing).
brace
A diagonal member used to stiffen a framework.
built ships
Complete database of NGC information after completion of the ship contract.
built-up member
A member built from multiple standard shapes to create a single, usually stronger, member.
bulkload
The process by which reference data in Microsoft Excel workbooks is loaded into the Catalog
database.
catalog
Repository of information about components and materials used in construction. When you use
catalog parts in the model, the software places an occurrence of the catalog part in the project.
This occurrence is a copy of the actual catalog part.
Catalog database
The database that contains the reference data. Each model database can reference a different
Catalog database.
ceiling
Overhead design of the cabin area, including distribution systems for power, water, and
ventilation.
chain
A set of continuous and tangent segments.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 452

Glossary

change history
Process of recording information such as who, when, and why for any given modification.
change management
Software features or manual procedures for managing the consequence of change. For
example, software can support a change management feature to report drawings that need
updating as a result of a change in a 3-D model.
change propagation
Ability of the software to intelligently modify dependent design information to reflect change in a
higher order object.
class
Grouping of individual objects that share some very significant, common characteristics.
class rule check
Verification that the developing design meets the rules of a particular classification society, such
as ABS, Lloyd's, or DNV.
Class Rules
Classification Society Design Rules.
classification folder
A folder in the Catalog hierarchy that contains part classes. Classification folders are one level
above part classes. The ClassNodeType and R-ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the Microsoft
Excel workbooks define the classification folders.
clip angle
A small angle-shaped piece of steel used for fastening members together.
codelist
A set of acceptable values for a particular property that can be referred to by an index number or
selected in a combo box. For example, the codelist for the material specification allows you to
select from a set of standard entries, such as ASTM A183-F316 Stainless Steel.
commodity code
A user-defined code that provides an index to parts in a catalog.
commodity item
A standard component found in a manufacturer catalog (an off-the-shelf component).
component
Physical part that a feature generates.
concurrent access
Ability of the software to allow multiple users to simultaneously access and modify the design of
a model.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 453

Glossary

consolidated tasks
A collection of tasks that can be run in batch. For example, the software allows you to extract a
set of drawings immediately or to schedule the batch extraction for a future time.
constraints
A logical restriction that controls how part symbols' ports relate to each other and to reference
ports. There are four constraints: parallel, perpendicular, coincident, and distance.
contract
A Work Breakdown Structure object representing a scope of work, usually performed by an
external supplier. The contract is related to a project and appears in the Work Breakdown
Structure hierarchy.
control point
A point that is used to control the shape of a NURBS (non-uniform rational basis spline) curve or
surface. Curves have a one-dimensional array of control points, while surfaces have a two-
dimensional array.
coordinate
The location of a point along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis.
coordinate system
A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the model. The most common
coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system, whereby points are located by
traversing the X-, Y-, and Z-axes of the model. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin
defined as 0,0,0.
cope
To cut out the top or bottom flanges and possibly the web so that one member frames into
another.
cover plate
A plate used in building up flanges, in a built-up member, to give greater strength and area, or
for protection.
cross section
The shape of a member when viewed along the member line.
cutback
An axial offset that typically represents the distance from a member centerline to its face.
Cutbacks are used to account for the difference between how a structure is modeled and
constructed in terms of lengths of members and quantities of materials.
cutting plane
A plane that cuts through an object.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 454

Glossary

damage records
Data relating to the damage and repair of structure or components that occurred during or after
construction of a model.
data interchange
Capability to output the design, or portions of the design, in a standard format for use or
movement to another computer software system.
database
Repository for the product model data. The database contains information to describe individual
objects in the data model and the relationships between objects as appropriate.
database backup
Process of recording a backup copy of the complete database or the incremental changes after
the date that the last complete copy was created.
database break and recovery
Utilities used to restore a database after files are corrupted.
database copy
Functionality to copy large collections of model objects from one design project to another
design project.
database management
Functionality related to managing a product model database.
database monitor record
Transactions that occur in order to provide database (DB) recovery after a stop in response with
a minimum of lost data.
degree
The highest polynomial factor in the curve or surface mathematical definition. A line is a degree
1 curve, while a cubic B-spline is a degree 3 curve.
degree of freedom
An allowable direction of movement, either translation or rotation. There are six possible
degrees of freedom (DOFs): translation X, Y, and Z, and rotation RX, RY, and RZ.
design alternative
Difference in a design represented by a separate version. A design alternative can be a new
design prepared as a proposed change, or one of several elective options that the builder or
customer selects. Each design alternative has an identification assigned so you can uniquely
refer to the design alternatives.
design approval log
Record of review and approval of parts of the design.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 455

Glossary

Glossary

Glossary

work order
Plant authorization for completing work; synonymous with a job order.
working plane
The available 2-D plane of movement for endpoint selection.
workset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) used in an interactive change, add, or
delete operation. Membership or lack of membership for any object in a workset does not
necessarily affect the actual stored representation of an object. However, you can change or
delete an object in a workset that also results in a change or deletion of the stored object.
Similarly, when you add a new object (not currently stored) to a workset, the software also adds
the object container.
workspace
Area that represents the portion of the model data needed to perform the intended task and
includes the user modeling settings.
workspace document
Document into which you can extract a portion of the model data for a user task.
Workspace Explorer
Tree or list representation of objects in your workspace.

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 468

Index
bulkload • 455
2
2D Symbol Logging Settings • 453 C
Can - Beam and Column End Point • 91
A Can - Beam and Column Intersection • 92
abaft • 454 Can - Cone Transition • 90
abstract part • 454 Can - Continuous Leg • 86
access holes • 454 Can - Diameter Change • 87
Across Model Family Definition Dialog Box • Can - Horizontal Beam • 85
321 Can - Multiple Braces • 87, 90
Active Template Library (ATL) • 454 Can - Single Axis Gap • 88
Add a custom batch process • 388 Can - Vertical Column • 85
Add a seam • 51 catalog • 455
Add auxiliary parts to an assembly Catalog database • 455
connection • 368 Catalog Tab (Sketched Feature Properties
aft • 454 Dialog Box) • 446
after body • 454 ceiling • 455
aftermost • 454 chain • 455
angle • 454 Chamfer Properties Dialog Box • 432
approval state • 454 Change a geometric construction to a
arrangement (accommodation) • 454 different definition • 268
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Change a topological point to a different
Box • 413 point definition • 225
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog change history • 456
Box (Members) • 370, 446 change management • 456
Assign part names at placement • 58 change propagation • 456
attribute • 454 Check Manufacturability • 395
axis • 455 Check objects for manufacturability • 396
class • 456
B class rule check • 456
Class Rules • 456
basic design • 455
classification folder • 456
Batch Process Selection Dialog Box • 390
clip angle • 456
Beam Part Properties Dialog Box • 438
codelist • 456
bending • 455
Collar Properties Dialog Box • 416
Bevel Parameters Tab • 161, 427
commodity code • 456
bill of material (BOM) • 455
commodity item • 456
Board Assignment by Filter • 383
Common Property Tabs • 403
Board Assignment by Filter Dialog • 383
component • 456
Board Assignment by Filter Progress Bar •
concurrent access • 456
384
Configuration Tab • 404
Board Management Service • 380
Configure account mapping for batch
Board Management Service Console • 381
services • 314
Boundary List Dialog Box • 44, 99
Configure the Smart 3D batch queues • 314
Boundary Methods • 32
consolidated tasks • 457
brace • 455
constraints • 457
Bracket Properties Dialog Box • 118
contract • 457
built ships • 455
control point • 457
built-up member • 455

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 469

Index

Intergraph Smart® 3D Structural Detailing User's Guide 477

SP3D StructuralManufacturingGuide
No ratings yet
SP3D StructuralManufacturingGuide
420 pages
SP3D SystemsSpecificationsGuide
No ratings yet
SP3D SystemsSpecificationsGuide
71 pages
SP3D CommonGuide
No ratings yet
SP3D CommonGuide
722 pages
TSMP1003 - Smart 3D Plant Structure and Civil Modeling 2018
No ratings yet
TSMP1003 - Smart 3D Plant Structure and Civil Modeling 2018
490 pages
Intergraph Smart 3D Training Overview
No ratings yet
Intergraph Smart 3D Training Overview
14 pages
Gentle Introto SPSchema
No ratings yet
Gentle Introto SPSchema
185 pages
Intergraph Smart Materials: SAP Material Interface
No ratings yet
Intergraph Smart Materials: SAP Material Interface
65 pages
SmartPlant Schema Patterns Overview
No ratings yet
SmartPlant Schema Patterns Overview
181 pages
Smart 3Dx Equipment Placement Guide
No ratings yet
Smart 3Dx Equipment Placement Guide
11 pages
Intergraph Smart Licensing: User's Guide
100% (1)
Intergraph Smart Licensing: User's Guide
52 pages
SP Electrical Users Guide
No ratings yet
SP Electrical Users Guide
1,264 pages
Smart 3D Setup and Administration Practice Labs 2014R1
100% (4)
Smart 3D Setup and Administration Practice Labs 2014R1
248 pages
Options Manager Guide
No ratings yet
Options Manager Guide
110 pages
SmartPlant Instrumentation Specs Guide
No ratings yet
SmartPlant Instrumentation Specs Guide
28 pages
Rule Manager Guide
No ratings yet
Rule Manager Guide
35 pages
SPElectrical New Features
No ratings yet
SPElectrical New Features
12 pages
DesignDataExchangePDMSGuide PDF
No ratings yet
DesignDataExchangePDMSGuide PDF
205 pages
SPI Chapter1 - Instruments and Control Loops
No ratings yet
SPI Chapter1 - Instruments and Control Loops
45 pages
Release Bulletin
No ratings yet
Release Bulletin
84 pages
Sp3d Install
50% (2)
Sp3d Install
232 pages
Spi 2018 Tutorial Part-1
No ratings yet
Spi 2018 Tutorial Part-1
150 pages
IsometricDrawingOptionsReferenceGuide PDF
No ratings yet
IsometricDrawingOptionsReferenceGuide PDF
540 pages
Intergraph Smart Electrical Guide 2018
No ratings yet
Intergraph Smart Electrical Guide 2018
55 pages
Cadwork Isogen Config For Beginers PDF
No ratings yet
Cadwork Isogen Config For Beginers PDF
230 pages
SPELInstall Guide
No ratings yet
SPELInstall Guide
87 pages
Projects
No ratings yet
Projects
126 pages
Structure Reference Data
No ratings yet
Structure Reference Data
217 pages
StructureGuide PDF
No ratings yet
StructureGuide PDF
569 pages
Design Data Exchange PDMS Guide PDF
No ratings yet
Design Data Exchange PDMS Guide PDF
167 pages
Howto Configurethe CDW
No ratings yet
Howto Configurethe CDW
46 pages
Read Me First - Smart 3D .Net Symbols
No ratings yet
Read Me First - Smart 3D .Net Symbols
14 pages
Pod Graphics Processor Users Guide
No ratings yet
Pod Graphics Processor Users Guide
71 pages
Smart 3D Setup and Administration Practice Labs 2016 PDF
50% (2)
Smart 3D Setup and Administration Practice Labs 2016 PDF
280 pages
Schem SPI External Editor Users Guide
No ratings yet
Schem SPI External Editor Users Guide
20 pages
Catalog: User's Guide
100% (1)
Catalog: User's Guide
1,013 pages
SP3D 2014 Installation Guide
No ratings yet
SP3D 2014 Installation Guide
217 pages
SmartPlant Instrumentation Overview 2016
No ratings yet
SmartPlant Instrumentation Overview 2016
11 pages
GT Strudl Handbook
No ratings yet
GT Strudl Handbook
242 pages
Systems Specifications Guide
No ratings yet
Systems Specifications Guide
73 pages
SmartPlant® Pipe Spools Integration Guide
No ratings yet
SmartPlant® Pipe Spools Integration Guide
13 pages
Common User's Guide
No ratings yet
Common User's Guide
701 pages
Systems and Specifications: User's Guide
No ratings yet
Systems and Specifications: User's Guide
70 pages
Export PDS To Smart 3D: User's Guide
No ratings yet
Export PDS To Smart 3D: User's Guide
118 pages
HangersSupportsReferenceDataGuide PDF
No ratings yet
HangersSupportsReferenceDataGuide PDF
98 pages
Molded Forms Guide
No ratings yet
Molded Forms Guide
1,482 pages
SP 3 Dprogguide 082014-1
No ratings yet
SP 3 Dprogguide 082014-1
70 pages
Equipment3DSymbolsGuide PDF
No ratings yet
Equipment3DSymbolsGuide PDF
559 pages
Project Management Guide
No ratings yet
Project Management Guide
451 pages
Smart3D 2016 Grid Structure - Classroom Master
100% (1)
Smart3D 2016 Grid Structure - Classroom Master
540 pages
SPRD How To Add Components For Smart3D
No ratings yet
SPRD How To Add Components For Smart3D
91 pages
Schem SPI DDP Export Utility
No ratings yet
Schem SPI DDP Export Utility
13 pages
Grids: User's Guide
No ratings yet
Grids: User's Guide
81 pages
HangersSupportsGenericParts PDF
No ratings yet
HangersSupportsGenericParts PDF
169 pages
Reports Guide SM3D
No ratings yet
Reports Guide SM3D
965 pages
3 DDOTNETGuide
No ratings yet
3 DDOTNETGuide
162 pages
IFCGuide
No ratings yet
IFCGuide
96 pages
Piping Isometric Drawings Guide
75% (4)
Piping Isometric Drawings Guide
857 pages
Interpret Human Piping Spec Guide
100% (1)
Interpret Human Piping Spec Guide
45 pages
SP3DProgGuide08 2014
No ratings yet
SP3DProgGuide08 2014
194 pages
P6 Scheduling: Retained Logic Explained
No ratings yet
P6 Scheduling: Retained Logic Explained
5 pages
M.Tech Embedded Systems Syllabus 2009-10
No ratings yet
M.Tech Embedded Systems Syllabus 2009-10
24 pages
Competitive Programmer Resume
No ratings yet
Competitive Programmer Resume
3 pages
Full Stack Development Lab Workbook
No ratings yet
Full Stack Development Lab Workbook
72 pages
Medtronic Offline Service Report Template
No ratings yet
Medtronic Offline Service Report Template
3 pages
Milk Station Mini Project Report
No ratings yet
Milk Station Mini Project Report
44 pages
Oracle Fusion Middleware 12c Certification Matrix
No ratings yet
Oracle Fusion Middleware 12c Certification Matrix
121 pages
Urban Farming Mini-Project Report
No ratings yet
Urban Farming Mini-Project Report
37 pages
Shopping Cart PoS System Project Report
No ratings yet
Shopping Cart PoS System Project Report
18 pages
Overview of Process Management in OS
No ratings yet
Overview of Process Management in OS
9 pages
Latest Xtream and M3U PLAYLIST 2025
62% (13)
Latest Xtream and M3U PLAYLIST 2025
18 pages
Why I Love Using Scribd for Sharing
No ratings yet
Why I Love Using Scribd for Sharing
2 pages
RISC-V Physical Design with DC & ICC II
No ratings yet
RISC-V Physical Design with DC & ICC II
33 pages
School Management System Project Report
No ratings yet
School Management System Project Report
9 pages
eGramSwaraj: Panchayat Workflow System
No ratings yet
eGramSwaraj: Panchayat Workflow System
24 pages
Functions of the Central Processing Unit
No ratings yet
Functions of the Central Processing Unit
3 pages
Blood Bank Management System Overview
No ratings yet
Blood Bank Management System Overview
5 pages
The Linux Kernel Module Programming Guide
No ratings yet
The Linux Kernel Module Programming Guide
94 pages
GW Basic Guide PDF
67% (6)
GW Basic Guide PDF
334 pages
Self-Assessment on Engineering Skills
No ratings yet
Self-Assessment on Engineering Skills
2 pages
Understanding Computer Components and Software
No ratings yet
Understanding Computer Components and Software
9 pages
GHT 200010
No ratings yet
GHT 200010
5 pages
IOCL Quarterly Safety Audit Report
No ratings yet
IOCL Quarterly Safety Audit Report
9 pages
Canvas v1.9 Software Manual
No ratings yet
Canvas v1.9 Software Manual
239 pages
IoT Course Syllabus for CSE 2025-2026
No ratings yet
IoT Course Syllabus for CSE 2025-2026
46 pages
Storage Capacity in Computers
No ratings yet
Storage Capacity in Computers
7 pages
Camera Freeform Resolution Data
No ratings yet
Camera Freeform Resolution Data
68 pages
Contact Details for Ajay Krishan
No ratings yet
Contact Details for Ajay Krishan
2 pages
After Effects Scripting Guide 22.3.0
No ratings yet
After Effects Scripting Guide 22.3.0
317 pages
Senior ETL Developer with Informatica Expertise
No ratings yet
Senior ETL Developer with Informatica Expertise
16 pages